Managing Circuits
A circuit represents an end-to-end connection between two or more connection termination points (CTPs). A circuit consists of an alternating series of cross-connections and link connections. In its simplest form, a circuit consists of a single cross-connection (if the circuit is defined between two CTPs on the same NE). A circuit can be bidirectional or unidirectional, point-to-point (PTP) or point-to-multipoint, and protected or unprotected.
Prime Optical allows you to create unidirectional and bidirectional circuits for CTC-based NEs. For unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR) circuits, you can create revertive or nonrevertive circuits. Prime Optical can route the circuits automatically, or you can route them manually.
You can access the
Circuit Table
from the Domain Explorer > Configuration > Circuit Report > Circuit Table. The selected circuit’s
Circuit Table
is displayed.
Note Circuit information is not available for the ONS 15216. For the ONS 15305, circuits can be created through CEC (Configuration > ONS 15305 > Launch Cisco Edge Craft).
For ONS 15305 NE releases 3.0 and later, circuits can be created in Prime Optical, CTC, and CEC. Circuits that are created in Prime Optical or CTC can be managed in Prime Optical, CTC, and CEC. But circuits that are created in CEC show unpredictable and erroneous behavior in Prime Optical and CTC.
For ONS 15305 NE releases earlier than R3.0, the circuit information is not available in Prime Optical. Circuits can be created in CEC but cannot be managed in Prime Optical.
Note Circuit management performance depends on an efficient DCN network. See the ONS 15454 user documentation for details.
Table 7-1
defines the circuit terms and options that are used throughout this topic.
Table 7-1 Circuit Terms and Options
|
|
Link
|
Represents a topological relationship between two physical termination points (PTPs) for a particular layer rate. The possible set of layer rates is determined by the layer rates terminated by the PTP. For example, an OC-N port will terminate a physical layer rate and a SONET layer rate.
|
Circuit
|
Represents an end-to-end connection between two or more CTPs.
|
Cross-connection
|
A (normally flexible) connection between two CTPs within the same NE.
|
Link connection
|
An inflexible (or fixed) connection between two CTPs that are contained by two PTPs connected by a link. It represents a portion of the transport capacity of a link, such as an STS-1 channel within an OC-N link.
|
PTP
|
A termination point that is the actual or potential endpoint of a link that might be abstracted as a PTP. It is the representation of a physical port.
|
CTP
|
Represents the actual or potential endpoint of a cross-connection, link connection, or circuit. A CTP is contained within a PTP. In some cases, there is a single CTP associated with a PTP, such as with a DS-1 PTP. There could also be multiple CTPs, such as with STS-1 or STS-Nc CTPs contained within an OC-N PTP.
|
Source
|
The circuit source is where the circuit enters the network.
|
Destination
|
The circuit destination is where the circuit exits the network.
|
Automatic circuit routing
|
Prime Optical routes the circuit automatically on the shortest available path based on routing parameters and bandwidth availability.
|
Manual circuit routing
|
Manual routing allows you to choose a specific path, not just the shortest path chosen by automatic routing. You can choose a specific STS or VT for each circuit segment for SONET nodes, or a specific VC4, VC3, or VC12 for each circuit segment for SDH nodes. You can also create circuits from work orders prepared by an OSS such as the Telcordia TIRKS system.
|
Low-order tunnel
|
Low-order tunnels allow VC3 and VC12 circuits to pass through an SDH node without using cross-connect card (XC10G and XCVXL) resources. Low-order circuits using tunnels use cross-connect capacity only at the source and destination nodes. One low-order tunnel can carry three VC3s, and each VC3 can carry 21 VC12s. One tunnel can carry one VC3 circuit span and 42 VC12 circuit spans, and each VC3 is a separate container that can contain a VC3 circuit span or 21 VC12 circuit spans.
|
Low-order aggregation point
|
Low-order aggregation points (LAPs) allow low-order VC12 and VC3 circuits to be aggregated into a VC4 for handoff to non-ONS networks or equipment, such as interoffice facilities (IOFs), switches, or digital access cross-connect systems. The VC4 grooming end of the LAP requires an STM-N card. LAPs can be created on MS-SPRings, 1-1, or unprotected nodes, but cannot be created on subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) nodes.
|
VT tunnel
|
VT tunnels allow VT1.5 circuits to pass through a SONET node without using cross-connect resources. VT circuits using VT tunnels use cross-connect capacity only at the source and destination nodes. One VT tunnel can carry 28 VT1.5 circuits.
|
VT aggregation point
|
VT aggregation points (VAPs) allow VT circuits to be aggregated into an STS for handoff to non-ONS networks or equipment, such as IOFs, switches, or digital access cross-connect systems. VAPs reduce VT matrix resource utilization at the node where the VT1.5s are aggregated onto the STS. This node is called the STS grooming end. The STS grooming end requires an OC-N, EC-1, or DS3XM-6 card. VT aggregation points can be created on BLSR, 1+1, or unprotected nodes, but cannot be created on UPSR nodes.
|
Viewing the Circuit Table
The
Circuit Table
shows circuit information for all circuits that make up a topology. A circuit describes a fixed-size bandwidth pipe that is fully cross-connected from one user-defined source point (node, slot, or port) to a second user-defined destination point across some number of node-to-node optical spans (zero if the circuit is local to a single NE).
An endpoint can be an actual physical drop port (DS-1, DS-3, and so on) or an STS-n or VT1.5 channel in an optical line. A multicast circuit consists of circuit spans that have one source endpoint and a sequence of destination endpoints.
Note See Icons and Menus Displayed in Prime Optical for details of all the icons displayed in this window.
To launch the
Circuit Table
, do any of the following:
-
Select a node in the
Domain Explorer
tree and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs
> Circuit Table
.
-
(For CTC-based NEs) Open the
Layer 2 Topology
table and choose
Configuration > Circuits
.
-
Select a NE or Rack or Shelf or Slot in the
Network Explorer
and choose
Configuration
>
Circuit Table
.
Note When launching the Circuit Table in a large or high-end network setup and on a larger scope (for example, for the Domain Explorer), a database timeout can occur due to the high volume of data being retrieved. As a workaround, launch the Circuit Table on a smaller scope.
Table 7-2
describes the fields in the Circuit table.
Table 7-2 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Table
|
|
Circuit Name
|
Displays the name of the selected circuit.
Note If there are multiple circuits with the same name displayed in the Circuit table, the label Duplicate appears in this column.
|
Note
|
Displays comments that have been entered for the selected circuit, and allows you to add additional comments.
|
Source NE: Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the NE ID and module type at the span source, the slot and port name and numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface). You can sort this column in ascending or descending order. The sort order is based on the NE ID and physical location.
|
Destination NE: Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the NE ID, the module type at the destination, the slot and port name and numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface). You can sort this column in ascending or descending order. The sort order is based on the NE ID and physical location.
|
Circuit Type
|
Displays the type of circuit selected. SONET circuit types are STS, VT, VT Aggregation, VT Tunnel, VT VCAT (shown as VT-v), STS VCAT (shown as STS-v), DWDM optical channel network connection (OCHNC), DWDM optical channel client connection (OCHCC), optical channel trail (OCHTRAIL), and OCHNC DCN.
SDH circuit types are HOP, LOP, LOPA, LOPT, HOV (HO VCAT), LOV (LO VCAT), OCHNC, OCHCC, OCHTRAIL, and OCHNC DCN.
|
Acpt Threshold
|
Displays the optical validation acceptance threshold value set for the GMPLS circuit.
|
Optical Value
|
Displays the optical validation result for the GMPLS circuit.
|
Circuit Size
|
Displays the size of the circuit:
-
SONET circuit sizes are VT1.5, VT2, STS 1, STS 3c, STS 6c, STS 9c, STS 12c, STS 24c, STS 48c, STS 96c, STS 192c, STS-1-
n
v, STS-3c-
n
v, STS-12c-
n
v, and VT1.5-
n
v.
-
SDH circuit sizes are VC11, VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, VC4-32c, VC4-64c, VC4-
n
v, VC4-4c-
n
v, and VC3-
n
v.
Note n can be any value from 0 through 256 (0 is valid when all members of a VCAT circuit are deleted).
-
FC/FICON circuit sizes are 10GFC, 4GFC, 2GFC, 1GFC, 4GFiCon, 2GFiCon, and 1GFiCon.
-
Data/Storage circuit sizes are ESCON, ETR-CLO, ISC-PEER, ISC3-PEER-1G, ISC-PEER-2G, ISC-COMPACT, ISC-CHANNEL1, and InfiniBand.
-
Video circuit sizes are HVDT, SD1/D1, DV6000, and DVB-ASI.
-
OCHNC circuit size is fixed as
Equipment Not Specific
.
-
OCHCC circuit sizes are STM1, STM4, STM16, STM64, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, 10GE, 1GE, 10GFC, 4GFC, 2GFC, 1GFC, 4GFiCon, 2GFiCon, 1GFiCon, ESCON, ETR-CLO, ISC-PEER, ISC3-PEER-1G, ISC-PEER-2G, ISC-COMPACT, HDVT, SD1/D1, DV6000, or Pass Through.
Note Not all circuit sizes are supported on all NE releases.
|
Circuit Direction
|
Indicates whether the circuit carries unidirectional (one-way) or bidirectional (two-way) traffic.
|
Customer ID
|
Optional text field that displays the customer ID of the circuit.
|
Service ID
|
Optional text field that displays the service ID of the selected circuit.
|
Circuit Status
|
Displays the status of the selected optical circuit:
-
Discovered—The circuit is completely configured in the network; all components are in place and a complete path exists from the circuit source to the circuit destination.
-
Partial—The circuit is not complete; one or more cross-connections are not in place or one of the spans is missing.
-
Creating—Prime Optical is creating the circuit.
-
Deleting—Prime Optical is deleting the circuit.
-
Discovered_TL1—A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like Prime Optical-created circuit is complete and has upgradable cross-connects. A complete path from source to destination(s) exists.
-
Partial_TL1—A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like Prime Optical-created circuit with upgradable cross-connects is missing a cross-connect, and a complete path from source to destination(s) does not exist. The circuit cannot be upgraded until the missing cross-connects are in place.
-
Partial (Split)—The circuit involves NEs that belongs to different network partitions and cannot be fully discovered by Prime Optical.
|
Circuit Service State
|
The
Circuit Service State
is an aggregate of the cross-connect states within the circuit. SONET, SDH, and DWDM circuits have different values.
For SONET circuits, values are:
-
In Service (IS)—All cross-connects in a circuit are in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) service state.
-
Out of Service (OOS)—All cross-connects in a circuit are in an Out of Service (OOS) service state, such as Out of Service and Management, Maintenance (OOS-MA,MT); Out of Service and Management, Disabled (OOS-MA,DSBLD); or Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service (OOS-AU,AINS).
-
OOS-PARTIAL—PARTIAL is appended to the OOS circuit service state when circuit cross-connect states are mixed and not all in IS-NR. The OOS-PARTIAL state can occur during automatic or manual transitions between states. For example, OOS-PARTIAL appears if you assign the IS,AINS administrative state to a circuit with DS-1 or DS3XM cards as the source or destination. Some cross-connects transition to the IS-NR service state, while others transition to OOS-AU,AINS. OOS-PARTIAL can appear during a manual transition caused by an abnormal event such as a CTC crash or communication error, or if one of the cross-connects could not be changed. The OOS-PARTIAL circuit state does not apply to OCHNC circuit types.
For SDH circuits, values are:
-
Unlocked—All cross-connects in a circuit are in the Unlocked-enabled service state.
-
Locked—All cross-connects in a circuit are in a Locked state (such as Locked-enabled,maintenance; Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService; or Locked-enabled,disabled).
-
Locked-partial—Partial is appended to the Locked circuit service state when circuit cross-connect states are mixed and not all in the Unlocked-enabled service state. The Locked-partial state can occur during automatic or manual transitions between states. The Locked-partial service state can appear during a manual transition caused by an abnormal event such as a CTC crash or communication error, or if one of the cross-connects could not be changed. The Locked-partial circuit state does not apply to OCHNC circuit types.
|
Circuit Service State
(continued)
|
For DWDM circuits, OCHCCs, OCH trails, and OCHNCs occupy three different optical layers. Each OCH circuit has its own administrative and service states:
-
The OCHCC service state is the sum of the OCHCC service state and the OCH trail service state. When creating an OCHCC circuit, you can specify an initial state for both the OCHCC and the OCH trail layers, including the source and destination port states. The ANSI/ETSI administrative states for the OCHCC circuits and connections are:
– IS/Unlocked
– IS,AINS/Unlocked,AutomaticInService
– OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
-
OCH trail ANSI/ETSI administrative states include:
– IS/Unlocked
– IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
– OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
-
The OCHNC circuit states are not linked to the OCHCC circuit states. The administrative states for the OCHNC circuit layer are:
– IS,AINS/Unlocked,AutomaticInService
– OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
|
Is Monitor
|
A value of
True
means that the circuit is a monitor circuit. A value of
False
means that the circuit is not a monitor circuit.
|
Circuit Protection Type
|
Indicates the circuit protection scheme. Values are:
-
2F BLSR—The circuit is protected by a 2-fiber bidirectional line switch ring (BLSR).
-
4F BLSR—The circuit is protected by a 4-fiber BLSR.
-
BLSR—The circuit is protected by both 2-fiber and 4-fiber BLSR.
-
UPSR—The circuit is protected by UPSR.
-
DRI—The circuit is protected by a UPSR dual ring interconnection (DRI).
-
1+1—The circuit is protected by a 1+1 protection group.
-
Y-Cable—The circuit is protected by a transponder or muxponder card Y-cable protection group.
-
Protected—The circuit is protected by diverse SONET topologies; for example, a BLSR and a UPSR, or a UPSR and 1+1.
-
Unprotected—The circuit is not protected.
-
2F-PCA—The circuit is routed on a protection channel access (PCA) path on a 2-fiber BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
4F-PCA—The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a 4-fiber BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
PCA—The circuit is routed on a PCA path on both 2-fiber and 4-fiber BLSRs. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
SPLITTER—The circuit is protected by a splitter protected transponder (TXPP_MR_2.5G or 2.5G_DMP).
-
Unknown—Circuit protection types appear in the Circuit Protection Type column of the Circuit table when the circuit status is Discovered. If the circuit is not discovered, the protection type is
Unknown
.
-
Lost—The circuit was protected, but the protection has been lost due to changes in the network.
|
Description
|
Displays a description of the selected circuit.
|
No. of VLANs
|
Displays the number of VLANs associated with the circuit.
|
No. of SPANs
|
Displays the number of spans for each contiguous concatenation (CCAT) circuit. For VCAT circuits,
N/A
is displayed. You must launch the member table for the parent VCAT to see the number of spans per member VCAT.
|
Is VCAT or Member Circuit
|
A value of
True
means that the circuit is a VCAT circuit. A value of
False
means that the circuit is a normal CCAT circuit.
|
OCHNC Wavelength
|
Indicates the wavelength provisioned for the OCHNC, in nanometers (nm).
The units are determined as follows:
-
wavelength (nm)
-
frequency (GHz)
|
OCHNC Direction
|
Indicates the direction of the OCHNC. Values are east-to-west, west-to-east, or N/A.
|
VCAT Member State
|
For VCAT members, indicates whether the members are enabled and active or temporarily disabled. When VCAT members are enabled and active, the value is In Group. If any of the members are disabled temporarily, the value changes to Out of Group.
For non-VCAT members, the value of this field is always N/A.
|
Circuit Alias Name
|
Displays the alias name of the circuit.
|
Restoration Status
|
Indicates the status of the circuit. Values are:
-
None—Circuit does not have any active restoration facility.
Note A value of “None” does not indicate that the circuit is not restorable.
-
Restoring—Circuit is restoring and the system is searching for a new optical path.
-
Restored—Circuit has been successfully restored and a new optical path has been found for the circuit.
-
Failed—Restoration facility has failed to retrieve a new optical path for the circuit.
-
Restored and Revertible—Circuit has been successfully restored and can be reverted to the original optical path by a specific user action.
Note The Restored and Revertible status can be reached only if the revert option value is Manual.
|
Note If a card is upgraded or changed on an NE and an existing circuit terminates on the changed card, the Circuit table display does not reflect the new card type for the circuit until Prime Optical next reads the circuit information from the network. You can force all circuits involved with the upgraded card in the Circuit table to update by marking the NE as Out of Service and then In Service.
Caution For TL1 circuits, if you simultaneously mark all of the NEs involved in the circuit as Out of Service, Prime Optical loses the EMS attributes (such as circuit alias, customer ID, and service ID). If you later mark all of the NEs involved in the TL1 circuit as In Service, the circuits are discovered, but the EMS attributes remain missing. To retain EMS attributes, you must upgrade the TL1 circuits to regular CTC circuits before adding EMS attributes and marking the NEs as Out of Service. To do this, select the TL1 circuit in the Circuit table and choose
Configuration > Reconfigure Circuit(s).
Note Circuit names are obtained from:
-
The source NE (for circuits created in Prime Optical or CTC)
-
Cross-connection names (for circuits created via TL1, or if the source NE is not discovered)
However, some NE versions do not support cross-connection names. For these NEs, circuits created in CTC are always discovered with the name “Unknown” in Prime Optical. Also, if the source NE is not connected, and if the only NEs available in Prime Optical are those NE versions that do not support cross-connection names, circuits created with CTC or Prime Optical have the name “Unknown” until the source NE is discovered.
Creating Circuits Using the Circuit Wizard
The
Create Circuit
wizard (
Configuration > Create Circuit
) allows you to create circuits on CTC-based NEs. Use the
Create Circuit
wizard to create an end-to-end circuit through a subnetwork. A subnetwork is defined as a set of NEs that are interconnected directly or indirectly through links known by Prime Optical. Prime Optical supports circuit provisioning across a heterogeneous network. Establish a circuit by specifying the A and Z termination points (TPs). You can create multiple circuits using the
Create Circuit
wizard; however, for VT tunnel circuits, the number you can create is limited by the bandwidth available on the VT tunnel being used. The maximum number of VT circuits that can be routed through a VT tunnel is 28.
Caution When adding CTC-based circuits, examine the links in the network to ensure correct operation. If any links are down, verify that the ports are not data communications channel (DCC) enabled. For information about viewing links, see
Filtering the Link Table.
Note You can create new circuits across subnetworks. To do so, you must first disable automatic grouping of NEs in the Control Panel. See Configuring Application-Specific Parameters for more information.
Note In earlier CTM releases, circuit creation failed if you tried to use automatic routing to create a circuit with 20 or more spans. In CTM R9.1 and later, you can use SQL to configure the circuit-autorouting-creation-timeout property in the Prime Optical database. This property increases the reply timeout for CORBA requests when you use automatic routing to create a complex circuit that uses 20 or more spans. You cannot configure the circuit-autorouting-creation-timeout property in the Prime Optical GUI; rather, you must use SQL to configure the value in the CTM_CONFIG_TABLE in the Prime Optical database. The range is from 0 to 600 seconds; the default is 150 seconds. Note that you can configure the value as high as 2,147,483,647 seconds; however, Prime Optical considers anything higher than 600 seconds as invalid. Also, a value of 0 (zero) indicates no timeout (or an instantaneous reply from the server), which is impossible in an actual application. Therefore, Prime Optical ignores a zero value or anything higher than 600 seconds and uses the default value of 150 seconds instead. Configuring the circuit-autorouting-creation-timeout property is helpful in large, complex network topologies when circuits involve 20 or more spans. For more information, see the Cisco Prime Optical Database Schema.
Prime Optical 10.6 supports the new functionality in launching the
Create Circuit
wizard. Choose Configuration > Create Circuit displays the following options:
-
Create DWDM circuit—creates a DWDM circuit
-
Create SONET/SDH circuit—creates a SONET/SDH circuit
Note If the Esc key is pressed while the plus symbol is enabled, the operation is canceled and the plus symbol returns to a pointer.
Note • Alien Wavelength (AWL) and FEC provisioning functionality is available on Circuit Wizard Panel and only for UNI circuits (VTXP- to-VTXP, VTXP-to-DWDM).
-
AWL provisioning functionality is available on
Domain Explorer
and also from
Network Map
.
-
AWL provisioning will apply only on CRS end (CRS node and corresponding peer node) means in case of VTXP-to-DWDM UNI circuit, AWL provisioning will not apply at the DWDM end.
For more information on Creating DWDM circuits, see Creating, Editing or Prerouting a DWDM Circuit. For information on Creating SONET/SDH circuits, see Creating SONET/SDH Circuits.
Table 7-3
describes the launch points and the expected behavior for the
Create Circuit
wizard.
Table 7-3 Create Circuit Wizard Launch Points and Expected Behavior
|
|
Source and destination NE nodes in the
Domain Explorer
or
Subnetwork Explorer
|
Select the source NE in the
Domain Explorer
or
Subnetwork Explorer
and choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
(or right-click the NE and choose
Create Circuit
). The pointer changes to a plus (+) symbol; select the destination NE. The destination NE must be in the same network partition as the source. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens. Source and destination NEs are preset to the selected source and destination.
Prime Optical 10.6 supports the new functionality in launching the
Create Circuit
wizard. Choose Configuration > Create Circuit displays the following options:
-
Create DWDM circuit—creates a DWDM circuit
-
Create SONET/SDH circuit—creates a SONET/SDH circuit
Note If the Esc key is pressed while the plus symbol is enabled, the operation is canceled and the plus symbol returns to a pointer.
|
Source and destination NE nodes in the
Network Map
|
Select the source NE in the
Network Map
and choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
(or right-click the NE and choose
Create Circuit
). The pointer displays a line extending from the source NE; select the destination NE. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens. Source and destination NEs in the
Create Circuit
wizard are preset to the selected source and destination NE nodes in the
Network Map
.
Prime Optical 10.6 supports the new functionality in launching the
Create Circuit
wizard. Choose Configuration > Create Circuit displays the following options:
-
Create DWDM circuit—creates a DWDM circuit
-
Create SONET/SDH circuit—creates a SONET/SDH circuit
|
Configuration > Create Circuit
in the
Circuit Report
|
Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
in the
Circuit Report
. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens. Select source and destination nodes. Destination nodes are filtered based on the source node. Source and destination nodes must be in the same network partition.
|
Configuration > Create Circuit
in the
NE Explorer
|
Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
in the
NE Explorer
for CTC-based NEs. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens with the selected NE as the source node. Source and destination nodes must be in the same subnetwork.
|
Configuration
>
Create Circuit
from the
Network Map
|
Choose
Configuration
>
Create Circuit
in the
NE Explorer
for CTC-based NEs. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens with the selected NE as the source and destination node. Source and destination nodes must be in the same subnetwork.
|
Creating, Editing or Prerouting a DWDM Circuit
Note Editing and prerouting a DWDM circuit is applicable for WSON circuits only.
The following DWDM circuits are created using the Create or Edit DWDM Circuit panel:
-
Optical channel network connections (OCHNCs)
-
Optical channel client connections (OCHCCs)
-
OCH trail circuits
Note Select an existing DWDM circuit and click Edit DWDM Circuit option. The Edit DWDM Circuit panel opens. From the panel, you can view the current attributes settings of the DWDM circuit and can modify the circuit attributes. You can update the circuit in a similar way to the creation procedure.
Note Prerouting option for circuits in the Circuit Wizard is available only when you create circuit from the network map.
Circuit creation is not allowed if PRBS is enable either in the source or destination or both the ports. An error message is displayed:
“The source and destination ports have PRBS enabled.”
Available options for the OCHNC, OCHCC and OCHT circuits:
In the Attributes Pane:
-
Name
-
Type
-
Bidirectional, WSON, UNI Interface (OCHNC, OCHT) check box
-
Protection Type
-
Service State (Only in Edit mode)
-
Admin State
-
Apply Trunk Ports check box
In the Details Pane:
-
Alias
-
Description
-
Customer ID
-
Service ID
In Source Termination Pane:
-
Managed Element
-
Termination Point
-
Local Drop (For OCHNC only)
In Destination Termination Pane:
-
Managed Element
-
Termination Point
-
Local Source (OCHNC only)
In Alien Wavelength Pane:
Configure Alien Wavelength
button
In WSON Attributes Pane:
-
Label
-
Validation (working)
-
Allow Regeneration
-
Circuit Diversity
-
Restore
-
Ignore Path Alarm
-
Channel Power Offset
-
Priority (only if restore is checked)
-
Revert (only if restore is checked)
-
Inherit (only if restore is checked)
-
Validation (restoration path and only if restore is checked)
In Wavelength Pane:
In Path Constraints Pane:
Note
-
The
Name
,
Admin State
,
Details
,
WSON Attribute
and the
Path Constraints
fields are editable for OCHNC and OCHT circuits only.
-
The
Name
,
Admin State
,
Details
and
Path Constraints
fields are editable for OCHCC circuits only.
-
Deletion of Network Elements in CPO domain explorer is not allowed if any of the OMS Link is terminated on the same NE or spawning on OTS link of same NE. Trying to delete in such situation, gives the following error message:
“You cannot delete the selected NE. You must delete OMS link first.”
-
It is not possible to edit the include or exclude constraints from Edit DWDM Circuits.
Circuit information includes status, state, source and destination node, slot, and port. You can view the
Circuits
tab in all views. The
Scope
field expands or decreases the scope of the circuits shown, for example, in card view you can change the scope to node or network to view all node or network circuits.
There is a minimal set of options that are required to create the circuit. The minimal options (enable/disable the create/edit button in the circuit wizard) include:
-
Type of circuit
-
Name of the circuit
-
Protection type
-
Source/destination termination point
Prerequisite for configuring Alien Wavelength:
-
Availability of Termination Point.
-
Compliance of Protection Type at both the end points.
-
Select the Fiber Attributes from CTC, before provisioning Alien Wavelength.
-
CRS PLIM port should be in lock state.
Note If the LMP link for CRS PLIM is not available, then there must be no termination points in the circuit wizard.
Complete the following steps to create a DWDM circuit:
Note The create button will be enabled only when the user has specified the minimal information for creating a circuit.
Step 1 Select a node for which to create/edit a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the Name pane, enter/edit the circuit name. The circuit name can be manually assigned or automatically generated.
Step 3 In the Type pane, choose
OCHTRAIL, OCHCC or OCHNC
. The circuit type determines the provisioning options that are displayed.
Step 4 If you require bidirectional or WSON provisioning, check the Bidirectional or WSON check box.
Note The Bidirectional check box is enabled only when OCHNC circuit type is chosen.
Step 5 From the
Protection
drop-down list (OCHCC and OCHNC only), choose PSM, Splitter, or Y cable.
Step 6 From the
Admin State
drop-down list, choose IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) or OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
Step 7 (Only in Edit mode) From the
Service State
drop-down list, choose IS, OOS or OOS-PARTIAL.
Step 8 Check the Apply Trunk Ports check box. Possible options are IS and OOS DSBLD.
Note The Apply Trunk Ports check box is enabled for OCHTRAIL circuit type only.
Step 9 Expand the
Details
field to configure all custom related fields. In the
Details
area, enter the following:
-
Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Customer ID—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 10 In the
Source Termination
area, enter the following:
-
Managed Element—Specifies a node in the network. Press the (CTRL+SPACE) key to display the available filters.
-
Termination Point—Allows you to change the managed element and to specify the termination point by pressing the CTRL+SPACE key or by pressing the search icon.
A new dialogue box is opened and the user can filter results by typing the appropriate fields in the Enter Search Query text box. Press the (CTRL+SPACE) key to display the available filters. When user selects an OCH-NC circuit the selection of local drop and local source is available.
Note When the user selects an OCH-NC circuit the selection of local drop and local source is available.
-
Local Drop—This field is displayed only when the OCH-NC circuit is selected.
Step 11 In the
Destination Termination
area, enter the following:
-
Managed Element—Specifies a node in the network.
-
Termination Point—Allows you to change the managed element and to specify the termination point by pressing the CTRL+SPACE key or by pressing the search icon.
A new dialogue box is opened and the user can filter results by typing the appropriate fields in the
Enter Search Query
text box. Press the (CTRL+SPACE) key to display the available filters. When user selects an OCH-NC circuit the selection of local drop and local source is available.
-
Local Source—This field is displayed only when the OCH-NC circuit is selected.
Step 12 To Provision Alien Wavelength using
Circuit Wizard
, do the following:
-
Open
Circuit Wizard
from
Network Map
or
Domain Explorer
, choose Source as CRS or DWDM and Destination as CRS or DWDM.
-
Check the
WSON
and
UNI interface
check boxes to enable and edit the Alien Wavelength parameters.
-
Enter
Managed Elements
and choose termination points for
Source Termination Point
and
Destination Termination Point
. The
Configure Alien Wavelength
button is enabled.
-
Click Configure Alien Wavelength and enter the following details in the Create Alien Wavelength pane:
The
Create Alien Wavelength
pane opens with provisioned Alien Wavelength and FEC values on Source and Destination peer node.
To change the provisioned AWL or FEC values on CRS and peer node:
a. Edit the supported
Alien Wavelength
and
FEC
values: Disabled, Standard, 20% High Gain FEC, and 7% High Gain FEC.
b. Click
OK
. A
Cisco Prime Optical Confirmation
dialog box opens to apply changes, Click Yes.
Note
-
If any mismatch is found in the provisioned AWL and FEC values, the system displays
Cisco Prime Optical Confirmation
dialog box to fix the mismatch values. Click Yes.
-
The system displays the Cisco Prime Optical Message dialog box, to ensure the configured message, click OK.
-
If no mismatch is found in the AWL and FEC values, the system displays Cisco Prime Optical Message dialog message box, click OK.
-
Click
Create
or
Preroute
button to provision the circuit.
– The system validates the provisioned AWL and FEC value on CRS and Peer Node (both Source and Destination in case of CRS-to-CRS UNI circuit). If any mismatch is found, the system displays the
Cisco Prime Optical Confirmation
dialog box to fix it, Click Yes.
-
The
Create Alien Wavelength
pane opens with provisioned AWL or FEC on peer node.
-
Click
OK
. User can change the provisioned AWL or FEC value on CRS and peer node. Refer
a
and the circuit provision starts.
-
Click
No
. The system stops the user to provision the circuit.
Step 13 In the
WSON Attributes
pane (displayed only for WSON), enter the following:
-
UNI Interface—Check the UNI Interface check box to configure the GMPLS UNI circuit between the ONS and CRS nodes on a DWDM node.
Note UNI circuits can be created either by using the CRS nodes or by using both the ONS and CRS nodes. But the source TP must always be the CRS node.
For UNI circuits in 10.6 NE, the
Circuit
Wizard allows you to choose between Manual or Automatic revert. However, circuit creation fails if the UNI link is not configured properly. If you choose Manual revert operation, and if the UNI link is not configured properly, then the following error is displayed:
-
Label—Enter/edit the name to display the circuit label. The label is a unique circuit identifier that is defined during circuit creation. WSON checks the label during circuit creation and restores its unique value along the path. Two identical strings can co-exist if the referred circuits do not use the same span. The label is also reported as an alphanumeric string in the circuit alarm.
-
Validation—Sets the validation mode. The available modes are:
– Full—The circuit gets created only if the circuit validation result is greater than or equal to the acceptance threshold value.
– None—The circuit is created without considering the acceptance threshold value.
Note You can set or edit the optical validation values for the main and the restoration path from the Create or Edit DWDM circuit window.
-
Allow Regeneration—Allows the
Control Panel
to find a regenerator deployed in the network. The regenerators are used when an optical LSP between two endpoints is not optical or lambda feasible with a single DWDM channel.
Allow regeneration check box when selected WSON circuits are allowed to traverse regeneration group and can potentially change wavelength.
-
Circuit Diversity—Sets the diversity path for the circuit. An existing circuit that is selected from the circuit pane is used as reference for the circuit diversity. This diverse path that will not be taken by the new circuit is displayed in the circuit pane. When selected, user can specify a circuit as diversity path option for the current circuit to be provisioned, the circuit is specified by name. Hints are displayed upon CTRL+SPACE key press or user can type a circuit name.
-
Ignore Path Alarms—Ignores the alarms on the path and create the circuit.
-
Restore—Restores the default values. Selects the priority level for the circuit. The priority is used in resolving resource allocation when two or more circuits require the same resource during circuit creation or restoration concurrently. The priority levels are 0 (High) to 7 (Low).
The Revert option reverts the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed. Options are:
– Automatic—Automatically reverts the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed, WSON alarms are acknowledged, and the soak time expires.
– Manual—Manually reverts the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed, the WSON alarms are acknowledged, and the soak time expires.
– Soak Time—The soak time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) is the period that the circuit on the restored path waits before switching to the original path after the failure is fixed. The circuit can revert to the original path after the soak time expires. The minimum value of soak time must be 00:00:01.
The
Inherit
option inherits the validation and acceptance threshold values from the primary circuit. When validation is selected, quality for working and protected path can be configured (if circuit is protected, the threshold can be applied to protected path too). The possible values are Green, Yellow, Orange and Red. See Table 7-4 for more information on the color definitions.
Note You can set/edit the optical validation values for the main and the restoration path from the Create/Edit DWDM circuit window.
Table 7-4 Color Definition Descriptions
|
|
Green
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is 0%.
|
Yellow
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 0% and 16%.
|
Orange
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 16% and 50%.
|
Red
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is greater that 50%. The channel failure is at great risk if the risk percentage is between 50 and 70.
|
-
Channel Power Offset—Set or edit the upstream and downstream power offset of the channel. Options are:
– Upstream (dBm)—Sets the value of offset in dBm, negative or positive, that the COM_TX of the card uses on its PerChannelPower default value. Upstream applies to the card in the outgoing path of the circuit.
– Downstream (dBm)—Sets the value of offset in dBm, negative or positive, that the COM_TX of the card uses on its PerChannelPower default value. Downstream applies to the card in the outgoing path of the circuit.
Step 14 In the
Wavelength
pane, enter the following:
-
Working—Working check box is selected when circuit is not protected, when circuit is protected the wavelength settings can be configured for working and protected paths. Wavelength band can be selected from the drop down list.
Specific wavelength and wavelength can be selected from the drop down list.
-
Protected—specified the slot, port, STS (if applicable), and VT (if applicable) of the protect path.
The units are determined as follows:
-
wavelength (nm)
-
frequency (GHz)
Step 15 Expand the
Path Constraints
pane and enter the following:
-
ME/Link—contains NEs and links included in the current wizard selection context. Network Elements and links names can be typed by the user or are automatically retrieved by the system by pressing the CTRL+SPACE key combination. NE displayed (CTRL+SPACE). Network Element and links can be added to include list in path constraints pressing the + key and can be added to exclude list by pressing - key.
You can select OMS links from the
ME/Link
field.
-
Include—Include and exclude list can be modified (- key on the left side). Click Include to include the selected node in the route. The node appears in the Included Nodes list. You can modify the order of the include constraints by selecting from the list using the drag and drop functionality.
-
Exclude—Click Exclude to exclude the selected node from the route. The node appears in the Excluded Nodes list.
When the circuit is protected the constraints can be applied to both working and protected circuit paths.
Interaction with the network map (when
circuit
wizard is started from the map):
-
Link can be included or excluded to the working and protected path with the following actions:
– mouse right click
– the key combination highlighted in the menu
The following constraints are highlighted in the following colors:
– Links and network elements added to exclude path are highlighted in red color
– the working constraints are highlighted in green color.
Click Preroute to preroute a circuit. Click Create to create a new dwdm circuit. Click Clear to clear the entered details.
Note Preroute option is available only when all the attributes of a circuit are set to 10.6 node and can be opened only from the network map. Preroute functionality is not applicable for protected circuits.
Prerouting a DWDM Circuit
After a DWDM circuit is prerouted, the WSON circuit preview is highlighted in the network map. Available options in the DWDM window after preroute:
Once the WSON preroute is available, you can include a link from the ME/Link drop-down to enable the
Activate
button.
Click Activate to activate a circuit.
Creating SONET/SDH Circuits
Use the Circuit Creation to set the circuit type for the circuit you create.
Table 7-5
describes the various types of circuits that can be created. The type of circuit that you can create depends on the NEs that you select as the source and destination.
Table 7-5 Circuit Types That Can Be Created Using the Create Circuit Wizard
|
|
|
Create an STS (including Ethernet), VT, VT tunnel, or VT aggregation circuit
|
—
|
Creating an STS (Including Ethernet), STS-V, VT, VT-V, VT Tunnel, or VT Aggregation Circuit
|
Create a VCAT circuit
|
You can create regular or open-ended VCAT circuits (STS-v, VT-v, VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT, or VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT).
|
Creating a Regular or Open-Ended VCAT Circuit
|
Create a VC_HO_path circuit
|
You can create unidirectional or bidirectional, revertive or nonrevertive, high-order path circuits.
|
Creating a VC_HO_Path_Circuit
|
Create a VC_LO_path circuit
|
You can create unidirectional or bidirectional, revertive or nonrevertive, low-order path circuits.
|
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Circuit
|
Create a VC low path tunnel connection
|
—
|
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Tunnel
|
Create a VC low path aggregation connection
|
—
|
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Aggregation Circuit
|
Create a monitor circuit
|
Use the Circuit table to create new circuits from the Prime Optical database and the associated cross-connections between NEs.
|
Creating a Monitor Circuit—CTC-Based NEs
|
Create a unidirectional drop circuit
|
Use the
Create Drop
wizard to create a new protected or unprotected unidirectional circuit drop.
|
Creating a Unidirectional Drop Circuit—CTC-Based NEs
|
Create a G1000-4 circuit
|
Provision G1000-4 point-to-point circuits and Ethernet manual cross-connects.
|
Creating G1000-4 Circuits
|
Create an E-series circuit
|
Create these configurations and Ethernet manual cross-connects.
|
Creating E-Series Circuits
|
Create a BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuit
|
—
|
Creating a BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI Circuit Automatically
Creating a BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI Circuit Manually
|
Note Low-order (LO) circuit options are not available for LO_VCAT circuits. Routing a LO_VCAT circuit, by selecting LO routing options to create a LAP/VC tunnel automatically, is not supported. If the LAP/VC tunnel already exists, and bandwidth is available, the LAP/VC tunnel is used to route LO_VCAT circuits.
Note When you create a low-order circuit and choose to create a tunnel automatically (by selecting the VT Tunnel on Transit Nodes option), the alias for the tunnel circuit will be the same as that provided for the low-order circuit. When you create multiple low-order circuits, the alias for the tunnel will be the same as the alias of the first low-order circuit.
Table 7-6
describes the fields in the
Create Circuit
wizard for optical devices.
Table 7-6 Field Descriptions for the Create Circuit Wizard—Optical Devices
|
|
|
The navigation pane on the left side of the
Create Circuit
wizard tells you where you are in the process of creating the circuit. The list of tasks shown initially is the default list of all possible tasks. As you move through the circuit creation, you are taken to the appropriate task. You can use the navigation pane to jump quickly from one task to the next, or to an already visited task.
Using the navigation pane is faster than using the Back and Next buttons, because you can jump over multiple panes in one step versus clicking Back or Next and moving through the panes sequentially.
Tip As you proceed through the wizard, the panes you have visited are highlighted in white and identified by a number. Panes that are not applicable to the current circuit creation sequence are shown in strikethrough italics.
Tip Click the Maximize button to expand the Create Circuit wizard. After you expand the Create Circuit wizard, the Maximize button changes to the Reset Size button. Click the Reset Size button to reduce the Create Circuit wizard to its original size.
|
|
Type
|
Select the type of circuit to create from the Type field.
Note The circuit type selected is displayed (dimmed) in other panes in the Create Circuit wizard. To change the circuit type you must return to the Type pane and make a new selection.
SONET and SDH circuits have different types. For SONET circuits, values are:
-
STS (including Ethernet circuits)
-
STS-v
-
VT
-
VT Aggregation
-
VT Tunnel
-
VT-v
For SDH circuits, values are:
-
VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT
-
VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT
-
VC_LO_PATH_AGGREGATION
-
VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT
-
VC_LO_PATH_TUNNEL
-
VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT
Note The available circuit types are based on the types selected for the user during user creation.
|
Number of Circuits
|
Enter the number of circuits that you want to create.
|
Auto-Ranged
|
If you are creating multiple circuits with the same slot and sequential port numbers, you can use Auto-Ranged to create the circuits automatically. The Auto-Ranged check box is checked automatically for multiple circuits.
|
For VC3 Port Grouping Only
|
(For SDH tunnel circuits only) Check this check box to create VC low-order path tunnels for port grouping. Using these circuits, VC4 tunnels can transport VC3 signal rates. Three ports form a port group. For example, in one E3 or one DS3i card, there are four port groups: Ports 1–3 = PG1, ports 4–6 = PG2, ports 7–9 = PG3, and ports 10–12 = PG4.
|
(fields depend on the circuit type)
|
|
Name
|
Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string, up to 80 ASCII characters. In earlier Prime Optical releases, the maximum circuit length was 48 ASCII characters. For VCAT circuits, the maximum circuit name length is 44 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
Note This field is mandatory if the GMPLS (for OCHxx circuits only) check box is checked. If you enter a character that is not supported by a specific router, a warning dialog box appears before you proceed to the Source tab.
|
Circuit Alias
|
Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
|
Description
|
Enter a description for the new circuit, up to 256 ASCII characters.
|
Type
|
Display only
. Indicates the type of circuit that you selected in the Type pane.
Note To change the circuit type you must return to the Type pane and make a new selection.
|
Size Group
|
Choose a size for the group that you want to provision. The following options are available:
-
SONET
-
SDH
-
Ethernet
-
FC/FICON
-
Data/Storage
-
Video
-
Other
|
Size
|
Specify the size of the circuit. SONET circuit sizes are VT 1.5, VT2, STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c, STS-36c, STS-48c, STS-96c, and STS-192c.
SDH circuit sizes are VC11, VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c, VC4-16c, VC4-32c, and VC4-64c.
If OCHNC is selected in Type, the OCHNC circuit size is Equipment Not Specific.
OCHCC circuit sizes are STM1, STM4, STM16, STM64, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, 10GE, 1GE, 10GFC, 4GFC, 2GFC, 1GFC, 4GFiCon, 2GFiCon, 1GFiCon, ESCON, ETR-CLO, ISC-PEER, ISC3-PEER-1G, ISC-PEER-2G, ISC-COMPACT, HDVT, SD1/D1, DV6000, or Pass Through.
For supported circuit sizes on Ethernet cards, see the
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
.
For single-card EtherSwitch, only STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, and STS-12c apply. For multicard EtherSwitch, only STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-6c apply.
FC/FICON circuit sizes are 10GFC, 4GFC, 2GFC, 1GFC, 4GFiCon, 2GFiCon, and 1GFiCon.
Data/Storage circuit sizes are ESCON, ETR-CLO, ISC-PEER, ISC3-PEER-1G, ISC-PEER-2G, ISC-COMPACT, ISC-CHANNEL1, and InfiniBand.
Video circuit sizes are HVDT, SD1/D1, DV6000, and DVB-ASI.
Note The available circuit sizes are based on the size limitation imposed on the user during user creation.
|
Band
|
(OCHNC circuits only) Choose the band that you want to provision.
|
Channel Group
|
Choose the channel group that you want to provision.
|
Bidirectional
|
Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit.
|
State
|
Select an administrative state for the new circuit. SONET and SDH circuits have different values. For SONET circuits, values are:
-
IS (In Service)—The circuit is in service and able to carry traffic.
-
IS AINS (In Service–Auto In Service)—Alarm reporting is suppressed, but the circuit is able to carry traffic.
-
OOS DSBLD (Out of Service–Disabled)—The circuit is out of service and unable to carry traffic.
-
OOS_MT (Out of Service–Maintenance)—The circuit is in maintenance state. The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit.
For SDH circuits, corresponding values are:
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,autoInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
|
Apply to Source/Destination Ports, If Allowed
|
Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
|
(available for OCHCC circuit type only)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature. Check this check box to filter the list of circuits to display only G.709 OTN-compatible circuits.
|
FEC
|
Disables or enables forward error correction.
OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
|
SF BER
|
Allows you to enter the signal fail bit error rate.
|
SD BER
|
Allows you to select the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
Mapping
|
The card can perform multiplexing per ITU-T G.709. The ODUk (client SONET/SDH payload) can be mapped to the Optical Channel (OTUk) either asynchronously (asynch mapping) or synchronously (synch mapping) with this setting.
|
Proactive Protection Attributes
|
Proactive Protection
|
Allows you to enable or disable the proactive protection that informs the CRS-1 routers of incoming Forward Error Correction (FEC) errors. By default, proactive protection is disabled.
|
Trigger Threshold
|
The maximum BER above which the Fast Re Route (FRR) is triggered. The default value for Enhanced FEC (EFEC) and FEC is 1E-3.
|
Revert Threshold
|
The BER value below which the FRR indication is switched off. The default value for EFEC and FEC is 1E-4.
Note The revert threshold value cannot be higher than the trigger threshold value.
|
Trigger Window
|
The time period for which the BER value is monitored to check whether it is higher than the trigger threshold. If the BER value is higher than the trigger threshold, an FRR request is triggered. The default value for EFEC and FEC is 30 ms. The valid trigger window range is from 1 to 10000.
|
Revert Window
|
The time period for which the BER value is monitored to check whether it is less than the revert threshold. If the BER value is below the revert threshold, the FRR indication given to the routers is removed. The default value for EFEC and FEC is 2000 ms. The valid revert window range is from 1 to 10000.
|
|
Protected
|
If checked, protection is enabled for OCHNC circuits.
Note The protected OCHNC must be bidirectional; the Bidirectional check box in the Circuit area must be checked. If the Use OCHNC Direction check box is checked, the Protected check box is dimmed.
|
|
Customer ID
|
Optional text field that displays the customer ID of the circuit. The customer ID can contain 0 to 256 alphanumeric and special characters.
|
Service ID
|
Optional text field that displays the service ID of the selected circuit. The service ID can contain 0 to 256 alphanumeric and special characters.
|
|
Symmetric
|
Display only
. Provisions the same number of members in both directions. For STS VCAT circuits, this check box is checked by default. Members use the same set of time slots but in opposite directions.
|
Open VCAT
|
Check this check box to create an open-ended VCAT circuit.
Note You cannot use open-ended VCAT circuits to create L2 topologies.
|
Member Size
|
Select a size for each VCAT member.
|
Number of Members
|
Specify the number of members to be configured for the VCAT circuit.
|
Mode
|
Choose the protection mode for the VCAT circuit:
-
None—Provides no protection. A failure on one member causes the entire VCAT circuit to fail.
-
SW-LCAS—Allows the VCAT circuit to adapt to member failures and keep traffic flowing after failures at a reduced bandwidth.
-
LCAS—Uses a signaling protocol where the members in a virtual concatenation group (VCG) can be dynamically changed without interrupting the operation of uninvolved members. If implemented correctly, there are no errors. LCAS allows the source and destination nodes of a VCG to signal to each other so that the addition or deletion of a member from the VCG can be synchronized without errors.
|
|
Protected
|
Check this check box to specify that circuit endpoints have to be selected only from cards that have embedded splitter-type protection.
|
Protected Drops (Non-Ethernet)
|
Specify whether protected drops are indicated. If selected, this option restricts the set of displayed source or destination termination points to those in 1:1, 1:n, or 1+1 protection groups.
|
Provision Working Go and Return on Primary Path
|
Check this check box to provision SNCP/UPSR protection routes in a Go and Return fashion as detailed in ITU-T G.841, to avoid too long a delay on another direction of traffic. This feature applies only to bidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected and the shortest path to the destination is always used as the working path.
|
Revertive
|
Specify whether traffic is reverted back to its original path when the conditions that diverted the circuit to the protect path are repaired. If you do not choose Revertive, traffic remains on the protect path.
|
Reversion Time
|
Specify the amount of time (in minutes) after which traffic reverts back to the original working path when conditions that caused the switch are cleared. The range is from 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The Cisco default is 5 minutes.
|
SF Threshold
(for SONET circuits only)
|
Set the UPSR path-level signal failure (SF) threshold.
Note This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
|
SD Threshold
(for SONET circuits only)
|
Set the UPSR path-level signal degrade (SD) threshold.
Note This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
|
Switch on PDI-P
(for SONET circuits only)
|
Specify whether traffic should switch based on a received STS payload defect indication.
Note This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
|
(fields depend on the NE selected and the circuit type)
|
Use Secondary Source
|
(For DRI, open UPSR, and open-ended SNCP circuits) Check this check box to define a secondary source. Then, specify the slot, port, STS, DS-1, or VT for the secondary source.
Note The Use Secondary Source check box is disabled when OCH-NC is selected as the circuit type.
|
NE ID
|
Choose from the list of available NE IDs to specify the source NE ID.
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork associated with the circuit source.
|
Slot
|
Specify the source slot (only for SONET/SDH circuits).
|
Port
|
Specify the source port (only for SONET/SDH circuits).
|
STS
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the source STS.
|
VT
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the source VT.
|
DS1
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the source DS-1.
|
VC4
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source VC4.
|
VC3
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source VC3.
|
VC11
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source VC11.
|
VC12
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source VC12.
|
TUG3
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source TUG3.
|
TUG2
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the source TUG2.
|
(fields depend on the NE selected and the circuit type)
|
Use Secondary Destination
|
(For DRI, open UPSR, and open-ended SNCP circuits) Check this check box to define a secondary destination. Then, specify the slot, port, STS, DS-1, or VT for the secondary destination.
Note The Use Secondary Destination check box is disabled when OCH-NC is selected as the circuit type.
|
NE ID
|
Choose from the list of available TPs to specify the destination TP.
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork associated with the circuit destination.
|
Slot
|
(For SONET and SDH circuits) Specify the destination slot.
|
Port
|
(For SONET and SDH circuits) Specify the destination port.
|
STS
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the destination STS.
|
VT
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the destination VT.
|
DS1
|
(For SONET circuits) Specify the destination DS-1.
|
VC4
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination VC4.
|
VC3
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination VC3.
|
VC11
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination VC11.
|
VC12
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination VC12.
|
TUG3
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination TUG3.
|
TUG2
|
(For SDH circuits) Specify the destination TUG2.
|
|
G.709 OTN
|
Disable or enable the G.709 OTN feature. Check this check box to filter the list of circuits to display only G.709 OTN-compatible circuits.
|
FEC
|
Disable or enable forward error correction. G.709 OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
|
SD BER
|
Set the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
Mapping
|
The card can perform multiplexing per ITU-T G.709. The ODUk (client SONET/SDH payload) can be mapped to the optical channel (OTUk) either asynchronously (asynch mapping) or synchronously (synch mapping) with this setting.
|
Revert/Reversion Time
|
(For protected circuits) Select the splitter-type protection.
|
(available only for open-ended VCAT circuits)
|
Autoranged
|
Check this check box if you want to specify only the first member destination, and Prime Optical will automatically choose the remaining destinations. (Note that you will lose previous selections if you switch to Autoranged.) When Autoranged is enabled, available consecutive endpoints are returned, starting from the endpoint that you selected. The destination endpoints can be on different ports only if the source endpoint supports split routing.
If you want to specify all of the destinations, leave the Autoranged check box unchecked.
|
VCAT Member Number
|
Select the member number to create.
|
Use Secondary Destination
|
Check this check box if you want to create a secondary destination. Then, specify the NE ID, subnetwork ID, slot, port, STS, VC, and VT for the primary and secondary destinations.
Note The Use Secondary Destination check box is dimmed if the source endpoint does not support split routing.
|
NE ID
|
Choose from the list of available NE IDs to specify the destination NE ID (and secondary NE ID, if applicable).
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork associated with the circuit destination (and secondary subnetwork ID, if applicable).
|
Slot
|
Specify the destination slot (and secondary slot, if applicable).
|
Port
|
Specify the destination port (and secondary port, if applicable).
|
STS
|
Specify the destination STS (and secondary STS, if applicable).
|
VC
|
Specify the destination VC (and secondary VC, if applicable).
|
VT
|
Specify the destination VT (and secondary VT, if applicable).
|
Add Destination button
|
Click this button to save the selected endpoint for the member number shown in the
VCAT Member Number
list box.
Note An error message warns you if duplicate endpoints are selected.
|
Show Destinations button
|
Click this button to launch a table that shows all of the open-ended VCAT primary and secondary destinations by VCAT member number.
|
|
Route Automatically
|
Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. Alternatively, you can disable automatic route selection and manually route the circuit where you specify all the intermediate hops on a hop-by-hop basis (up to 64 hops per circuit). You can manually route the circuit using either one of the following views:
-
Graphical—Provides a map view that displays the nodes and links you can use to create the circuits. You can select the nodes and links that you need for your circuit from the map view.
-
Graphical Enhanced—Provides an enhanced map view that includes top-level and detailed views. Top-level view types are subnetworks or groups to which the nodes belong. Each subnetwork or group view type contains a detailed view that displays the nodes and links that belong to the specific subnetwork or group. From the detailed view, you can select the nodes and links that you need for creating the circuit.
-
Textual—Provides a text view that lists the nodes and links you can use to create the circuits.
Note If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled.
|
Using Required Nodes/Links
|
(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) If checked, Prime Optical automatically routes the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. There are several ways you can specify the required nodes and links. Choose one of the following:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
|
Review Route Before Creation
|
(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route in one of the following ways:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
|
VT-DS3 Mapped Conversion
|
(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) If checked, you can route the circuit using the DS3XM12 card. Not applicable for data cards (ML-series and CE-100T-8 cards). VT-DS3 mapped conversion is for VAP circuits and is automatically selected while creating a VAP circuit using a DS3 port.
|
Time Slot Restriction
|
If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical will use to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note Time Slot Restriction is not available for OCHCC and OCHNC circuit types.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Time Slot Restriction field, in the Member Preferences table. The STS/VC4 values you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
|
Common Fiber Routing
|
(For VCAT circuits) Click this radio button to route each member circuit on the same fiber.
|
Split Routing
|
(For VCAT circuits) Click this radio button to route member circuits on separate paths.
|
Member Preferences
|
(For VCAT circuits) Specify the following information for member circuits:
-
Number—Enter a number between 1 and 256 to identify the member.
-
Name—Enter a unique name to identify the member. The name can contain up to 48 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.
-
Protection—Specify the member circuit protection type (Fully Protected, PCA, DRI, or Unprotected).
-
Node Diverse—Specify the node diversity for each member circuit:
– Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths are node-diverse.
– Desired—Prime Optical attempts node diversity. If node diversity is impossible, Prime Optical uses primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse.
– Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Prime Optical creates primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse. The paths might be node-diverse, but Prime Optical does not check for node diversity.
-
Set Protection for All—Allows you to choose the same protection type for all members.
-
Set Node Diversity for All—Allows you to specify the same node diversity for all members.
|
Fully Protected Path
|
If selected, Prime Optical ensures that the circuit is fully protected. You can provision the circuit in a UPSR DRI topology by checking the Dual Ring Interconnect check box. Alternatively, if the circuit must pass across unprotected links, Prime Optical creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the following node diversity specifications:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths of the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path are node-diverse.
-
Desired—Prime Optical attempts node diversity. If node diversity is impossible, Prime Optical uses primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Prime Optical creates primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path. The paths might be node-diverse, but Prime Optical does not check for node diversity.
|
Protection Channel Access
|
To route the circuit on a BLSR protection channel, if available, uncheck the Fully Protected Path check box, and check the Protection Channel Access check box.
|
Dual Ring Interconnect
|
If you selected Fully Protected Path and the circuit will be routed on a DRI, check the Dual Ring Interconnect check box.
Note For DRI and iDRI manually created circuits, you must double-click the DRI span for it to become DRI. A single-click does not enable the DRI span.
|
Diverse Shared Risk Link Group (SRLG)
|
If checked, fully protected circuits are routed through working and protected links that do not share risk groups.
|
Overlay Ring
|
Check this check box if your configuration uses multiple cross-connections per node, and you want to provision the circuit across multiple rings. An overlay ring circuit traverses at least one node more than once and results in multiple cross-connections per node, per circuit. An overlay ring circuit can be protected or unprotected. Note that Prime Optical does not support a configuration where the source or destination node requires multiple cross-connections.
|
Conversion Route Constraints
(available only if VT-DS3 Mapped Conversion is checked)
|
NE ID
|
Choose from the list of available NE IDs to specify the source NE ID.
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork associated with the circuit source.
|
Slot
|
Specify the source slot that contains the DS3XM12 card.
|
DS3 Mapped STS
|
Choose
Circuit Source
or
Circuit Dest
.
|
(available only for VT and VC LO path circuits)
|
VT/VC LO Tunnel on Transit Nodes
|
This option is available if the VT or VC circuit passes through a node that does not have a low-order tunnel, or if an existing low-order tunnel is full. Low-order tunnels allow VT/VC circuits to pass through NEs without consuming low-order cross-connect card resources. In general, creating tunnels is a good idea if you are creating many low-order circuits from the same source and destination.
Note For VCAT circuits, the VC LO Tunnel on Transit Nodes check box is disabled if you selected Split Routing as the routing preference and you specified any route constraints in the Route Constraints pane.
|
VT Aggregation Point (VAP)/VC LO Aggregation Point (LAP)
|
(For SONET) This option is available if you are creating a VT1.5 circuit to a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6; or an OC-N port on a BLSR, 1+1, or Unprotected node. A VAP allows VT1.5 circuits to be routed through a node using one STS connection on the cross-connect card matrix rather than multiple connections on the VT1.5 matrix.
(For SDH) This option is available if you are creating a VC12 circuit to an STM-N port for handoff to non-SDH networks or equipment, such as an IOF, switch, or DACS. A LAP allows low-order circuits to be routed through a node using one VC4 connection on the cross-connect card high-order matrix rather than multiple connections on the low-order matrix.
|
Circuit Source is STS/VC4 Grooming Node
|
Creates the VAP or LAP on the VT or VC circuit source node. This option is available only if the VT circuit originates on a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6, or OC-N card, or if the VC circuit originates on an STM-N card.
|
Circuit Destination is STS/VC4 Grooming Node
|
Creates the VAP or LAP on the VT or VC circuit destination node. This option is available only if the VT circuit terminates on a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6, or OC-N card, or if the VC circuit terminates on an STM-N card.
|
None
|
Choose this option if you do not want to create a low-order tunnel or a VAP/LAP. This is the only available option if Prime Optical cannot create a low-order tunnel or VAP/LAP.
|
(available only for Ethernet cards or EtherGroups)
|
VLANs
|
Choose from the list of available VLANs to associate an existing VLAN to the circuit. If the Circuit VLANs list is empty, Prime Optical assigns the default VLAN.
To create a new VLAN, click the
New VLAN
button. Enter a unique VLAN name and ID. The VLAN ID must be an integer greater than 1 but less than 4093. Click
OK
; then, click
OK
in the Successfully created
VLAN confirmation
dialog box. The new VLAN appears in the list of VLANs. The list is ordered alphanumerically by VLAN name, where numbers precede letters and uppercase letters precede lowercase ones.
Note Gigabit Ethernet G-series, ML-series, and E-series cards that are configured in port ML-series mode do not support VLAN assignment.
|
Enable Spanning Tree
|
Check this check box to enable spanning tree protection for the circuit. This option is disabled for intranode and multicard Ethernet circuits.
|
VT/VC LO Grooming Node Selection
|
Map view
|
Allows you to tag a node in the map view as a VT or VC LO grooming node. By clicking a node icon, the node is automatically tagged as a VT or VC LO grooming node.
|
(available if the Route Automatically check box is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected)
|
VCAT Member Number
|
(For VCAT circuits) Use the drop-down list to choose route constraints for each member circuit.
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. Map view also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected.
When you position your mouse cursor over a link, the tooltip displays ring information.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Include list with the default STS or VC4 value. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
|
Operation in progress
|
(Available if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Shows the percentage of the operation that is complete during the calculation of the graphic objects.
|
Selected view type
|
(Available if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
|
Current view
|
(Display only and available if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Displays the detailed view type that you selected.
|
Available view
|
(Available if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Allows you to select a detailed view type.
|
Top view button
|
(Available if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Click this button to change the top-level view type at any time.
|
Available Spans
|
Select a link on the map view (related to the selected node) and its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field. The newly added link appears in blue on the map view.
|
Selected Spans
|
Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field. The removed link appears in green to indicate its unselected state.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
|
Links/Nodes tab
|
Select the links/nodes in the graphic to populate the selected node field.
|
BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab
|
(For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) Click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
|
(available if the Route Automatically check box is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected)
|
Src NE ID
|
Displays the circuit source NE.
|
Dest NE ID
|
Displays the circuit destination NE.
|
Current NE ID
|
Displays the currently selected NE.
|
Adj NE ID
|
Displays all the NEs that are adjacent to the currently selected NE.
|
Available Links
|
Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
|
Available Spans
|
After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
|
Selected Spans
|
Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
|
Next Hop
|
Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop.
|
Reset
|
Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
|
Alternate Route
|
Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
|
(applicable only if the Using Required Nodes/Links check box is checked)
|
VCAT Member Number
|
(For VCAT circuits) Use the drop-down list to choose route constraints for each member circuit.
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used for the inclusion and exclusion of links or nodes during the specification of route constraints. The included nodes are shown in blue and the excluded links are shown in magenta.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Exclude All Nodes—Allows you to exclude all nodes associated with the source and destination nodes. This reduces the time required to calculate the best route. The excluded nodes are dimmed, and are listed in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
pane. All nodes that are not listed in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
pane are accounted for while calculating the best route. To include a node again for a route-constraint calculation, choose the link from the list and click
Remove
.
If you are using the Graphical Enhanced view, to exclude a node while calculating the route constraints, select the node and click
Exclude
.
The excluded nodes are dimmed, and are listed in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
pane. To include a node again for a route-constraint calculation, choose the link from the list and click
Remove
.
Right-click a link or link bundle and choose
Expand
or
Collapse
from the shortcut menu. If you choose
Collapse
, the links are hidden and the link bundle is displayed. If you choose
Expand
, the link bundle is hidden and the links are displayed.
The color of the link bundle represents the link selection status, which has the following order of priority (from highest to lowest):
-
Magenta—The link bundle contains at least one excluded link.
-
Blue—The link bundle contains at least one selected link.
-
White—The link bundle contains at least one selecting link.
-
Green—All links in the link bundle are selectable.
-
Red—The link bundle contains at least one unselectable link.
The link bundle tooltip reports the number of links in the bundle and the name of each link. The background color of each link name in the tooltip represents the link selection status.
|
Src NE ID
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Displays the circuit source NE.
|
Dest NE ID
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Displays the circuit destination NE.
|
Nodes
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Select Nodes if you want to add nodes to your circuit route.
|
Links
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Select Links if you want to add links to your circuit route.
|
Current NE ID
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Displays the currently selected NE.
|
Adj NE ID
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Displays all the NEs that are adjacent to the currently selected NE.
|
Available Links
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
|
Select Nodes
|
(For textual manual provisioning) Lists all nodes related to the currently selected NE. Choose a node from the list.
|
Selected Node/Link
|
Displays the currently selected NE or link.
|
Included Links/Nodes
|
Displays the list of links or nodes that are included in the route. All links and nodes listed in this pane are considered while calculating route constraints.
|
Excluded Links/Nodes
|
Displays the list of links or nodes that are excluded from the route.
To remove the links and nodes from the list (to include the nodes to calculate route constraints), select the node and click
Remove
.
|
(applicable only if the Review Route before creation check box is checked)
|
VCAT Member Number
|
(For VCAT circuits) Use the drop-down list to view the route chosen for each member circuit.
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used for the inclusion and exclusion of links or nodes during the specification of route constraints. The included nodes are shown in blue and the excluded links are shown in magenta.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
|
Review Route
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view displays information about the spans selected during autorouting in the subnetwork. The selected spans are shown in blue. When you select a span, its corresponding details are displayed in the Selected Span pane. The circuit summary displays the total hops and the cost for working and protect paths for the routed circuit.
|
Source NE ID
|
Displays the ID of the NE selected as the source node.
|
Destination NE ID
|
Displays the ID of the NE selected as the destination node.
|
Included Spans
|
If you enabled automatic route selection in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
|
Selected Span
|
Displays detailed information about the span selected in the Included Spans list.
|
Add and Remove buttons
|
You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the Selected Spans list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
This functionality is similar to manual routing, except that the route from the source to the destination is preselected.
Note You can modify the review route only for the following circuit types: STS_CIRCUIT, VT_CIRCUIT, VT_TUNNEL, VT_AGGREGATION, STS_VCAT_CIRCUIT, VT_VCAT_CIRCUIT, VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT, VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT, VC_LO_PATH_TUNNEL, VC_LO_PATH_AGGREGATION, VC_HO_VCAT_CIRCUIT, and VC_LO_VCAT_CIRCUIT.
|
|
Circuit Summary
|
Summarizes the selections you made in the wizard panes. To change the circuit summary, click
Back
and change your selection(s).
|
Creating an STS (Including Ethernet), STS-V, VT, VT-V, VT Tunnel, or VT Aggregation Circuit
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, choose STS (including Ethernet circuits), STS-v, VT, VT-v, VT Tunnel, or VT Aggregation. (Choose STS for ML-series circuits. For ONS 15454, choose STS for circuits starting and ending at a fiber channel [FCMR] card). In the Number of Circuits field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically. You can create only one circuit for the following circuit types:
-
ML-series
-
VT-v
-
STS-v
-
VT aggregation
-
VT tunnel
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size (STS circuits only)—Specify STS-1, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, STS-48c, STS-96c, or STS-192c. The valid size for circuits involving the DS3i card is STS-3c. Valid sizes for circuits involving the FC_MR-4 card are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-24c, and STS-48c.
For a single-card EtherSwitch, only STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, and STS-12c apply. For a multicard EtherSwitch, only STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-6c apply.
Valid circuit sizes for an ML-series circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, STS6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-96c.
-
Bidirectional—Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit. (For STS and VT circuits only; E-series circuits, G-series circuits, ML-series circuits, VAP circuits, and VT tunnels are bidirectional.)
-
State—Choose an administrative state to apply to the circuit:
– IS—The circuit is in service.
– OOS—The circuit is out of service. Traffic is not passed on the circuit.
– OOS–AINS—The circuit is out of service until it receives a valid signal, at which time the circuit state automatically changes to in service.
– OOS–MT—The circuit is in maintenance state. The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state in the State field to the circuit source and destination ports. Uncheck this check box for ML-series circuits.
-
Protected Drops (Non-Ethernet)—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed on protected drops only. If selected, this option restricts the set of displayed source or destination termination points to those in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection groups. Uncheck this check box for ML-series circuits.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go or return to the primary path.
Note Prime Optical currently provisions unidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits following the GR-1400 standard. For bidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits, you can check the Provision working go and return on primary path check box to route the working and protect paths in one direction following the ITU-T G.841 standard. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected by this new routing, and the shortest path is always used as the working path.
-
Path Selectors (UPSR protection only)—If the circuit will be routed on a UPSR, set the UPSR path selectors as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If you do not choose Revertive, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion Time—If Revertive is checked, specify the amount of time (in minutes) after which traffic reverts back to the original working path when the conditions that caused the switch are cleared.
– SF Threshold (for STS circuits only)—Set the UPSR path-level SF bit error rate (BER) threshold. This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
– SD Threshold (for STS circuits only)—Set the UPSR path-level SD BER threshold. This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
– Switch on PDI-P (for STS circuits only)—Specify whether or not traffic should switch based on a received STS payload defect indication. This field is visible only for point-to-point topologies.
-
(Optional) Specify the customer information:
– Customer ID—Identify the end user of the circuit.
– Service ID—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
NE ID—Choose from the list of available TPs to specify the source TP.
-
Source—Specify the source slot, port, STS, DS1-14, and VT.
-
Use Secondary Source—Check this check box to create a secondary source. Then, specify the NE ID, slot, port, STS, DS1-14, and VT for the secondary source.
Note The secondary source is applied to open-ended UPSR and DRI.
Step 6 In the
Destination
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
NE ID—Choose from the list of available TPs to specify the destination TP.
-
Destination—Specify the destination slot, port, STS, DS1-14, and VT.
-
Use Secondary Destination—Check this check box to create a secondary destination. Then, specify the slot, port, STS, DS1-14, and VT for the secondary destination.
Note The secondary destination is applied to open-ended UPSR and DRI.
Step 7 In the
VLAN Selection
pane (available only if an E-series Ethernet card or EtherGroup is chosen as the source or destination slot), do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Choose from the list of available VLANs to associate an existing VLAN to the circuit. If the Circuit VLANs list is empty, Prime Optical assigns the default VLAN.
Note Gigabit Ethernet G-series, ML-series, and E-series cards that are configured in Port Mapped mode do not support VLAN assignment.
b. To create a new VLAN, click the
New VLAN
button. Enter a unique VLAN name and ID. The VLAN ID must be an integer greater than 1 but less than 4093. Click
OK
; then, click
OK
in the Successfully created
VLAN confirmation
dialog box. The new VLAN appears in the list of VLANs. The list is arranged alphanumerically by VLAN name, where numbers precede letters and uppercase letters precede lowercase ones.
c. Check the Enable Spanning Tree check box to enable spanning tree protection for the circuit. This option is disabled for intranode and multicard Ethernet circuits.
Step 8 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
.
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. VT-DS3 Mapped Conversion—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) If checked, you can route the circuit using the DS3XM12 card. Not applicable for data cards (ML-series and CE-100T-8 cards). VT-DS3 mapped conversion is for VAP circuits and is automatically selected while creating a VAP circuit using a DS3 port.
e. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Time Slot Restriction field, in the Member Preferences table. The STS/VC4 values you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
f. Fully Protected Path—If not selected, choose
Protection Channel Access
to route the circuit on a BLSR protection channel.
g. Fully Protected Path—If selected, Prime Optical ensures that the circuit is fully protected. You can provision the circuit in a UPSR DRI topology by checking
Dual Ring Interconnect
. Alternatively, if the circuit must pass across unprotected links, Prime Optical creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the following node diversity specifications:
-
Required—Prime Optical ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path are node-diverse.
-
Desired—Prime Optical attempts node diversity. If node diversity is impossible, Prime Optical uses primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Prime Optical creates primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path. The paths might be node-diverse, but Prime Optical does not check for node diversity.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
h. Overlay Ring—(
For STS high-order circuits only
) Check this check box if your configuration uses multiple cross-connections per node, and you want to provision the circuit across multiple rings. An overlay ring circuit traverses at least one node more than once and results in multiple cross-connections per node, per circuit. An overlay ring circuit can be protected or unprotected. Note that Prime Optical does not support a configuration where the source or destination node requires multiple cross-connections.
Step 9 In the
VT Options
pane (available only if you are creating a VT circuit and automatic routing is selected), choose one of the following radio buttons; then, click
Next
:
-
VT Tunnel on Transit Nodes
-
VAP
-
None
Step 10 If you created a VAP, in the
VT Grooming
pane, select the following:
-
STS Grooming Node
-
VT Grooming Node
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning pane
(available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to Top.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list with the default STS or VC4 value. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. Select a link on the map view (related to the selected node) and its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field. The newly added link appears in blue on the map view.
e. Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field. The removed link appears in green to indicate its unselected state.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
f. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 12 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
. Displays the circuit source NE.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
. Displays the circuit destination NE.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
. Displays the currently selected NE.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
. Displays all the NEs that are adjacent to the currently selected NE.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the nodes or links to include in the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to Top.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 14 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat these substeps for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 15 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), do the following:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Displays the following information about the span selected in the Included Spans list:
-
From—Span source
-
To—Span destination
-
Source STS—STS value
-
VT—VT time slot
Note If you selected VT as the circuit type in the Attributes pane, choose Review Route Before Creation in the Routing Preferences pane, and selected VT Tunnel on Transit Nodes in the VT Options pane, the VT tunnel is created regardless of whether or not you are finished provisioning the circuit. Even if you click the Back button in the Review Route pane and change the VT circuit options, the newly created VT tunnel will not be deleted.
d. (Optional) You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the Selected Spans list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
e. Click
Finish
.
Step 16 In the message box, click
OK
.
Caution It takes several seconds to create a circuit. During that interval, if a new circuit is added with the same name, both circuits might be identified as duplicates. Therefore, be careful not to add a duplicate circuit during the creation of the first circuit.
Creating a Regular or Open-Ended VCAT Circuit
This section describes how to create regular and open-ended VCAT circuits (STS-v, VT-v, VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT, or VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT).
Prime Optical supports open-ended VCAT circuits that originate on Ethernet or ML-series cards. The destination can be OC-n or STM-n cards. You can route open-ended VCAT circuits to or from any of the cards or ports where VCAT circuits originate or terminate. Compared to a standard VCAT circuit, an open-ended VCAT circuit has only one VCG.
VCAT and open-ended VCAT circuits are supported on the following cards:
-
CE-100T-8—Supported on ONS 15454 SONET NEs
-
CE-MR-6—Supported on ONS 15310 MA SONET and ONS 15310 MA SDH NEs
-
CE-MR-10—Supported on ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH NEs
-
E100-WAN-8, GigE-WAN-2, STM-1-1-8-LC—Regular VCAT circuits are supported on ONS 15305 CTC NEs
Note Open-ended VCAT circuits are not supported on ONS 15305 CTC NEs.
-
FCMR—Supported on ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH NEs
-
ML1000, ML100T, ML-MR-10—Supported on ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH NEs
-
ML-100T-8—Supported on ONS 15310 CL, ONS 15310 MA SONET, and ONS 15310 MA SDH NEs
Note Each card supports a different number of members. You can create only bidirectional, revertive/nonrevertive, high-order/low-order path circuits. Prime Optical can route the circuits automatically, or you can route them manually. Also, all members can be routed through a single fiber, or you can specify a split-fiber routing preference. You must choose a destination for each member.
Complete the following steps to create a VCAT or open-ended VCAT circuit:
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, select STS-v, VT-v, VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT, or VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT.
For SDH nodes:
-
LO_VCAT circuits from an ONS 15454 SDH CE-100T-8 card to a 15305 E-100 card, and a CE-MR-10 card to another CE-MR-10, ML-series, G1000, or OCn card are supported for VCAT circuits
-
LO_VCAT (VC3) circuits between a GigE-WAN-2 and ML1000 card (number of members = 2), and between a GigE-WAN-2 card and CE-100T-8 card (number of members = 1) are supported for VCAT circuits
Step 3 In the
Number of Circuits
field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Note You can create only one VCAT circuit at a time.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. For VCAT circuits, the circuit name is a free-format string, up to 44 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Type—Displays the circuit type.
-
Bidirectional—In this release, only bidirectional VCAT circuits are supported.
-
State—Specify IS, OOS_DSBLD, OOS_MT, IS_AINS, or OOS_OOG (Out of Service–Out of Group).
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Symmetric—
Display only.
-
Open VCAT—Check this check box to create an open-ended VCAT circuit. You cannot use open-ended VCAT circuits to create L2 topologies.
-
Member Size—Select the size of the member for the VCAT circuit. This is the unit for VCAT circuit size.
-
Number of Members—Select the number of members (for the member size previously selected). Different cards support different numbers of members with different sizes.
-
Mode—Select the LCAS mode (None, Sw-LCAS, or LCAS) for the VCAT circuit. If you select a mode other than None, only the cards supporting the LCAS mode selected are listed for the source and destination selection.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
-
Path Selectors—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Note The customer ID and service ID for the VCAT circuit are applied to all member circuits.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed on the node. Enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
NE ID—Choose from the list of available TPs to specify the source TP.
-
Source—Specify the following:
– Source slot.
– Port.
– Member—Available only if the source slot is a CE-MR-10 card in Manual mode. Click
Edit Members
to add or remove member CTP(s) of the source TP. In the
Member Selection
dialog box, you can use the
Add
button to move the CTP(s) to the Selected CTPs list, use the
Remove
button to move the CTP(s) to the Available CTPs list, or click
Up
or Down to reorder the Selected CTPs list. Click OK to close the
Member Selection
dialog box.
Step 6 In the
Destination
pane (available for regular VCAT circuits), set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed on the node. Enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
NE ID—Choose from the list of available TPs to specify the destination TP.
-
Source—Specify the following:
– Destination slot.
– Port.
– Member—Available only if the source slot is a CE-MR-10 card in Manual mode. Click
Edit Members
to add or remove member CTP(s) of the source TP. In the
Member Selection
dialog box, you can use the
Add
button to move the CTP(s) to the Selected CTPs list, use the
Remove
button to move the CTP(s) to the Available CTPs list, or click
Up
or Down to reorder the Selected CTPs list. Click OK to close the
Member Selection
dialog box.
Step 7 In the
Members Destination
pane (available for open-ended VCAT circuits), do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Specify the destinations:
-
To specify only the first member destination, check the Autoranged check box; Prime Optical will automatically choose the remaining destinations. (Note that you will lose previous selections if you switch to Autoranged.) When Autoranged is enabled, available consecutive endpoints are returned, starting from the endpoint that you selected. The destination endpoints can be on different ports only if the source endpoint supports split routing.
-
To specify all of the destinations, leave the Autoranged check box unchecked.
b. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member number to create.
c. If you want to create a secondary destination, check the Use Secondary Destination check box. Then, specify the NE ID, subnetwork ID, slot, port, STS, VC, and VT for the primary and secondary destinations.
Note The Use Secondary Destination check box is dimmed if the source endpoint does not support split routing.
d. Click the
Add Destination
button to save the selected endpoint for the member number shown in the
VCAT Member Number
list box.
e. Click the
Show Destinations
button to launch a table that shows all of the open-ended VCAT primary and secondary destinations by VCAT member number.
Step 8 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Select the routing preference for VCAT members. If all members are to be routed on a single fiber, choose
Common Fiber Routing
. If members are to be routed through different fibers in case one fiber does not have sufficient bandwidth, choose
Split Routing
.
f. Specify the following member preferences:
-
Number—Select the member number, a unique number from 1 to 256.
-
Name—Edit the name for the member circuit. By default,
VCAT-NAME_Default MemberNumber
is the member name, where
VCAT-NAME
is the parent VCAT circuit name being created.
-
Protection—Select the protection mechanism for member circuits:
– Fully Protected—To route the circuit on a protected path, choose
Fully Protected
(default). A fully protected circuit route is created based on the diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have UPSR/SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to UPSR/SNCP path segments, if any exist.
– Unprotected—To create an unprotected circuit, choose
Unprotected
.
– PCA—To route the circuit on a PCA route, choose PCA. PCA circuits are unprotected. Once you enable PCA, a label reading PCA will appear on the link.
– DRI—To configure dual ring interconnect protection on a VCAT circuit, choose
DRI
. All VCAT members must share the same DRI protection type. You cannot assign DRI protection when textual manual provisioning is enabled.
-
Node Diversity—Select node diversity for each member circuit.
-
Diverse SRLG—Select
True
if fully protected circuits will be routed through working or protected links that do not share risk groups.
g. If you selected Fully Protected Path, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended UPSR/SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended UPSR/SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended UPSR/SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
N/A (Not Applicable)—Prime Optical does not support Dual Ring Interconnect.
Note Node diversity can be set for each member when Fully Protected is selected and Split Fiber Routing is selected.
Step 9 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to Top.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 10 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 11 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Select the member from the
Member
list box at the top of the pane. For common fiber routing, there is no Member list box, because constraints are applied to all the members. In split fiber routing, you can select different constraints for different members by selecting a member and then selecting spans or NEs to be included or excluded for routing the circuit. Specify the nodes or links to include in the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which constraints are to be selected.
d. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
e. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
g. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
h. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
i. Repeat substeps
d
to
h
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
j. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
i
for each member.
k. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 13 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), do the following:
Note Member routing information is displayed when a particular member is selected from the list box.
a. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member.
b. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
c. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
d. Selected Span—Review the span information.
e. (Optional) You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the Selected Spans list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
f. Click
Finish
.
Step 14 In the message box, click
OK
. The VCAT or open-ended VCAT circuit is displayed in the
Circuit Table
.
Creating a VC_HO_Path_Circuit
The E1-N-14 card, STM-N cards, and Ethernet cards all use high-order path circuits. You can create unidirectional or bidirectional, revertive or nonrevertive, high-order path circuits. Prime Optical can route the circuits automatically, or you can route them manually. The E3-12 and DS3i-N-12 cards use VC low-order path tunnels.
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, choose
VC_HO_Path_Circuit
. The circuit type determines the provisioning options that are displayed. In the
Number of Circuits
field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—Select the circuit size. VC high-order path circuits can be VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC4-64c for optical cards and for some Ethernet cards (depending on the card type). Of the Ethernet cards, only the G-1000 can use VC4-3c, VC4-8c, and VC4-16c. The “c” indicates concatenated VC4s.
-
Bidirectional—Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
Note Prime Optical currently provisions unidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits following the GR-1400 standard. For bidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits, you can check the Provision working go and return on primary path check box to route the working and protect paths in one direction following the ITU-T G.841 standard. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected by this new routing, and the shortest path is always used as the working path.
-
Path Selectors (SNCP Protection Only)—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If
Revertive
is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Source
if you want to create an SNCP bridge/selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the
Destination
pane, set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Destination
if you want to create a circuit destination point for unidirectional/bidirectional circuits.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck the
Fully Protected Path
check box and go to Step 10.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 10.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
-
Diverse Shared Risk Link Group—If checked, fully protected circuits are routed through working and protected links that do not share risk groups.
g. Overlay Ring—Check this check box if your configuration uses multiple cross-connections per node, and you want to provision the circuit across multiple rings. An overlay ring circuit traverses at least one node more than once and results in multiple cross-connections per node, per circuit. An overlay ring circuit can be protected or unprotected. Note that Prime Optical does not support a configuration where the source or destination node requires multiple cross-connections.
Step 10 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
l. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the
Selected Spans
field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the Included Links/Nodes or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 14 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 15 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Circuit
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, choose
VC_LO_Path_Circuit
. The circuit type determines the provisioning options that are displayed. In the
Number of Circuits
field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—Select
VC3
,
VC11
, or
VC12
.
-
Bidirectional—Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
Note Prime Optical currently provisions unidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits following the GR-1400 standard. For bidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits, you can check the Provision working go and return on primary path check box to route the working and protect paths in one direction following the ITU-T G.841 standard. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected by this new routing, and the shortest path is always used as the working path.
-
SNCP path selector defaults—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold.
– SD threshold.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Source
if you want to create an SNCP bridge/selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the
Destination
pane, set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Destination
if you want to create a circuit destination point for unidirectional/bidirectional and VC_LO_Path_Circuits.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 10.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 10.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 10 If you did not select
Using Required Nodes/Links
in Step 9, specify VC-LO circuit options. In the
VC LO Options
pane, choose one of the following radio buttons; then, click
Finish
(if you did not check
Review Route Before Creation
in Step 9) or
Next
(to view the spans included in the route in the
Review Route
pane):
a. VC LO Tunnel on transit nodes
b. VC LAP
-
Circuit source is VC4 grooming node
-
Circuit destination is VC4 grooming node
c. None
Step 11 If you created a VC LAP, in the
VC LO Options
pane, select the following; then, click
Finish
(if you did not check
Review Route Before Creation
in Step 9) or
Next
(to view the spans included in the route in the
Review Route
pane).
-
VC4 Grooming Node
-
VC LO Grooming Node
Step 12 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the
Available Spans
list. The
Add
option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the
Selected Spans
list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 14 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes or Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 15 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 16 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), do the following:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically chooses spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
d. (Optional) You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the Selected Spans list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
e. Click
Finish
.
Step 17 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Tunnel
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, choose
VC_LO_Path_Tunnel
. The circuit type determines the provisioning options that are displayed. The E3-12 and DS3i-N-12 cards must use VC low-order path tunnels. In the
Number of Circuits
field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically. Check the For VC3 Port Grouping Only check box to create VC low-order path tunnels for port grouping.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—For VC_LO_Path_Tunnel, VC4 is the default setting.
-
Bidirectional—For VC_LO_Path_Tunnel, Bidirectional is the default setting.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
-
SNCP path selector defaults—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Source
if you want to create an SNCP bridge/selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the
Destination
pane, set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Destination
if you want to create a circuit destination point for unidirectional/bidirectional.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 If port grouping is disabled, do the following in the
Routing Preferences
pane; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
Note Route Automatically is disabled if port grouping is enabled.
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Step 10 Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and go to Step 11. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 12.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 12.
Step 11 If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
Step 12 In the Manual Provisioning pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the
Available Spans
list. The
Add
option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the
Selected Spans
list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 14 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and Using Required Nodes/Links are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 15 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the I
ncluded Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 16 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), do the following:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically chooses spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
d. (Optional) You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the
Selected Spans
list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
e. Click
Finish
.
Step 17 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating a VC_LO_Path_Aggregation Circuit
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Note VC_LO_path_aggregation circuits are not supported by the ONS 15305 CTC.
Step 2 In the
Type
pane, choose
VC_LO_Path_Aggregation
. The circuit type determines the provisioning options that are displayed. In the
Number of Circuits
field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The Cisco default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the
Attributes
pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—For VC_LO_Path_Aggregation, VC4 is the default setting.
-
Bidirectional—For VC_LO_Path_Aggregation, Bidirectional is the default setting.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
SNCP path selector defaults—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If
Revertive
is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Source
pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the
Attributes
pane, and the cards installed in the node.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the
Destination
pane, enter the appropriate information for the circuit destination.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 10.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 10.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 10 In the Manual Provisioning pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the
Available Spans
list. The
Add
option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the
Selected Spans
list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Textual radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the
Selected Spans
field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 14 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), do the following:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
d. (Optional) You can review and modify the automatic route that is selected for circuit creation. Click
Add
to change the automatically selected route by adding a route to the
Selected Spans
list. Click
Remove
to remove a route from the list.
e. Click
Finish
.
Step 15 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating a Monitor Circuit—CTC-Based NEs
Use the
Create Monitor Circuit
wizard to create a new monitor circuit on CTC-based NEs.
Note A monitor circuit’s alias is based on the alias of the original circuit. Prime Optical does not generate unique numbers; therefore, two monitor circuits created on the same circuit have the same alias, while their names are different (including two unique numbers appended in the network).
Step 1 Select the CTC-based NE where you want to create a monitor circuit and open the
Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the
Circuit Table
, select the bidirectional circuit to be monitored.
Step 3 Choose
Configuration > Modify Circuit
(or click the
Modify
tool). The
Modify Circuit
dialog box opens.
Step 4 In the
Modify Circuit
dialog box, click the
Monitor
tab. The
Monitor
tab displays the ports that can be used to monitor the circuit selected in Step 2.
Step 5 In the
Monitor
tab, select the monitor source and click
Create Monitors
. The
Create Monitor Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 6 In the
Create Monitor Circuit
wizard, enter the following monitor circuit information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter the monitor circuit name.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
Step 7 In the
Source
pane, choose the source node, slot, port, STS, VT, or DS-1 for the monitored circuit; then, click
Next
.
Step 8 In the
Destination
pane, choose the destination node, slot, port, STS, VT, or DS-1 for the monitored circuit; then, click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 10.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 10.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 10 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
b. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
c. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
d. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
e. Click
Add
. The span is added to the
Selected Spans
list.
f. Repeat substeps
b
to
d
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
g. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each member until all members are routed.
h. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
i. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
b. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
c. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
d. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
e. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
f. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
g. (Optional) Repeat substeps
a
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
h. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 14 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 15 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 16 In the confirmation dialog box, click
OK
.
Step 17 In the
Modify Circuit
dialog box, click
Close
. The new monitor circuit is displayed in the
Circuit Table
.
Creating a Unidirectional Drop Circuit—CTC-Based NEs
Use the
Create Drop
wizard to create a new protected or unprotected unidirectional circuit drop. A circuit drop can also be created on bidirectional Ethernet circuits. For all other types of circuits, drop creation is possible only on unidirectional circuits.
Step 1 Select the CTC-based NE where you want to create a new unidirectional circuit drop and open the Circuit table.
Step 2 In the
Circuit Table
, select the unidirectional circuit where you want to create the drop.
Step 3 Choose
Configuration > Modify Circuit
(or click the
Modify
tool). The
Modify Circuit
dialog box opens.
Step 4 In the
Modify Circuit
dialog box, click the
Drops
tab, which displays the existing drops on the selected circuit.
Step 5 In the Drops tab, click
Create
. The
Create Drop
wizard opens.
Step 6 In the
Create Drop
wizard, fill in the following fields; then, click
Next
.
Note Fields shown depend on the type and size of the selected circuit.
-
NE ID—Select the NE ID.
-
Slot—Specify the drop slot.
-
Port—Specify the drop port.
-
STS—(For SONET circuits) Specify the drop STS.
-
VT—(For SONET circuits) Specify the drop VT.
-
DS1—(For SONET circuits) Specify the drop DS-1.
-
VC4—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop VC4.
-
VC3—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop VC3.
-
VC11—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop VC11.
-
VC12—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop VC12.
-
TUG3—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop TUG3.
-
TUG2—(For SDH circuits) Specify the drop TUG2.
-
Target Circuit State—Select an administrative state for the new circuit drop. SONET and SDH circuits have different values. For SONET circuits, values are:
– IS
– OOS DSBLD
– IS AINS
– OOS MT
For SDH circuits, values are:
– Unlocked
– Locked, disabled
– Unlocked, automaticInService
– Locked, maintenance
-
Apply to drop ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the drop port.
Step 7 (For protected unidirectional circuits) In the
Routing Preferences
pane, specify the routing and protection preferences for the new drop.
The
Routing Preferences
pane in the
Create Drop
wizard is similar to the
Routing Preferences
pane in the
Create Circuit
wizard, except that for a drop, the Fully Protected Path check box is unchecked (disabled) for Ethernet circuits and unchecked (enabled) for all other circuits. You can check or uncheck the Fully Protected Path check box. If the existing circuit is protected and during drop creation you check or uncheck the Fully Protected Path check box, an error message is returned after you click Next. You must change the protection option if the error message indicates that all drops must have the same protection.
Subsequent panes in the
Create Drop
wizard are identical to the panes in the Create Circuit wizard (see Table 7-6).
Step 8 Click
Finish
.
Step 9 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 10 In the
Modify Circuit
dialog box, click
Close
.
Creating G1000-4 Circuits
This section explains how to provision G1000-4 point-to-point circuits and Ethernet manual cross-connects. Ethernet manual cross-connects allow you to cross-connect individual Ethernet circuits to an STS channel on the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH optical interface and to bridge non-ONS SONET network segments.
G1000-4 Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits
G1000-4 cards support point-to-point circuit configuration. Provisionable circuit sizes are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-48c. Each Ethernet port maps to a unique STS circuit on the SONET side of the G1000-4.
The G1000-4 card supports any combination of up to four circuits from the list of valid circuit sizes; however, the circuit sizes can add up to no more than 48 STSs. Due to hardware constraints, the initial release of the G1000-4 card (software release 3.2) imposes additional restrictions on the combinations of circuits that can be dropped onto a G1000-4 card. These restrictions are transparently enforced by the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH, so there is no need to keep track of restricted circuit combinations.
-
The restriction occurs when a single STS-24c is dropped on a card. In this instance, the remaining circuits on that card can be another single STS-24c or any combination of circuits of STS-12c size or smaller that add up to no more than 12 STSs (that is, a total of 36 STSs on the card).
-
No circuit restrictions are present if STS-24c circuits are not being dropped on the card. The full 48 STSs of bandwidth can be used (for example, a single STS-48c circuit or 4 STS-12c circuits).
-
Since the restrictions apply only when STS-24c circuits are involved but do not apply when two STS-24c circuits are on the same card, the impact of these restrictions can be easily minimized. Group the STS-24c circuits together on a card separate from circuits of other sizes. The grouped circuits can be dropped onto other G1000-4 cards on the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH. The G1000-4 uses STS cross-connects only. No VT-level cross-connects are used. All SONET-side STS circuits must be contiguous.
Caution G1000-4 circuits connect with OC-N cards or other G1000-4 cards. G1000-4 cards do not connect with E-series Ethernet cards.
Caution The G1000-4 card requires the XC10G card to operate. The G1000-4 card is not compatible with XC or XCVT cards.
Complete the following steps to create G1000-4 point-to-point Ethernet circuits:
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
, select the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH NE to use as one of the Ethernet circuit endpoints.
Step 2 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 3 From the Type field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The
Attributes
pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 4 In the
Name
field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 6 From the
Size
field, choose the size of the circuit. The valid circuit sizes for a G1000-4 circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-48c.
Step 7 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked.
Note The states of the Number of Circuits check box and the Protected Drops check box are provided.
Caution If provisioning a G1000-4 circuit on a UPSR, do not check the Switch on PDI-P check box. Checking the Switch on PDI-P check box might cause unnecessary UPSR protection switches.
Step 8 (Optional) Specify the customer information:
Step 9 Click
Next
.
Step 10 In the
Source
pane, choose the circuit source node. Either end node can be the circuit source.
Step 11 From the
Slot
field, choose the slot containing the G1000-4 card to use as one end of the point-to-point circuit.
Step 12 In the
Port
field, choose a port.
Step 13 Click
Next
.
Step 14 In the
Destination
pane, choose the circuit destination node.
Step 15 In the
Slot
field, choose the slot containing the G1000-4 card to use as the other end of the point-to-point circuit.
Step 16 From the
Port
field, choose a port.
Step 17 Click
Next
. The
Routing Preferences pane
opens.
Step 18 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 19.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 19.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 19 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Graphical
or
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 20 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when R
oute Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 21 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Graphical
or
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 22 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 23 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included in the circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 24 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 25
To change the slot property information for the Ethernet card,
see Slot Properties—G1000-4.
Note To change the capacity of a G1000-4 point-to-point circuit, delete the original circuit and reprovision a new, larger circuit.
G1000-4 Manual Cross-Connects
ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH NEs
r
equire end-to-end CTC visibility between nodes
for normal provisioning of E
thernet
circuits. W
hen equipment from other vendors is placed between the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH, equipment based on
Open System Interconnection/Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol (O
SI/TARP) does not allow tunneling of the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH TCP/IP-based data communications channel (DCC). To circumvent a lack of continuous DCC,
the E
thernet
circuit must be manually cross-connected to an S
TS channel
riding through the non-ONS network. This allows an Ethernet circuit to run from ONS node to ONS node while utilizing the non-ONS network.
Note In this topic, cross-connect and circuit have the following meanings: Cross-connect refers to the connections that occur within a single ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH to allow a circuit to enter and exit an ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH. Circuit refers to the series of connections from a traffic source (where traffic enters the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH network) to the drop or destination (where traffic exits an ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH network).
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
, select the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 2 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 3 From the Type field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The
Attributes
pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 4 In the
Name
field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 5 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 6 From the
Size
field, choose the size of the circuit. The valid circuit sizes for a G1000-4 circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-48c.
Step 7 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked.
Step 8 (Optional) Specify the customer information:
Step 9 Click
Next
.
Step 10 In the
Source
pane, choose the circuit source node.
Step 11 From the
Slot
field, choose the slot containing the Ethernet card.
Step 12 From the
Port
field, choose a port.
Step 13 Click
Next
.
Step 14
In the
Destination
pane, choose the current node as the circuit destination.
Step 15
From the
Slot
field, choose the optical card that will carry the circuit.
Step 16
Choose the STS that will carry the circuit from the STS field; then, click
Next
.
The
Routing Preferences
pane opens.
Note For Ethernet manual cross-connects, the same ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH serves as both source and destination.
Step 17 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 18.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 18.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 18 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 19 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the
Available Spans
pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 20 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Graphical
or
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Right-click the line, and click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Right-click the line, and click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 21 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Right-click the line, and click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Right-click the line, and click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 22 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included in the circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 23 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 24 Provision the Ethernet ports. For port provisioning instructions, see Provisioning E-Series Ethernet Ports for VLAN Membership.
Step 25
To complete the procedure, repeat Steps 1 to 23 for the second
ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH
.
Note The appropriate STS circuit must exist in the non-ONS 15454 SONET or non-ONS 15454 SDH equipment to connect the two STSs from the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet manual cross-connect endpoints.
Caution If a CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears on an Ethernet manual cross-connect,
the two Ethernet circuits might have a circuit-size mismatch. For example, a circuit size of STS-3c might have been configured on the first ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH,
and a circuit size of STS-12c might have been configured on the second ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH
. To troubleshoot the cause of the CARLOSS alarm, see the “Alarm Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.
Creating E-Series Circuits
Ethernet circuits can link ONS nodes through point-to-point, shared packet ring, or hub-and-spoke configurations. Two nodes usually connect with a point-to-point configuration. More than two nodes usually connect with a shared packet ring configuration or a hub-and-spoke configuration. This section includes procedures for creating these configurations and also explains how to create Ethernet manual cross-connects. Ethernet manual cross-connects allow you to cross-connect individual Ethernet circuits to an STS channel on the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH optical interface and also to bridge non-ONS SONET network segments.
Note Before creating Ethernet connections, choose an STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c circuit size.
Note When creating an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, Ethernet cards must be configured as single-card EtherSwitch. Multicard mode does not support STS-12c Ethernet circuits.
Provisioning E-Series EtherSwitch Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits (Multicard, Single-Card, or Port-Mapped)
The ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, and ONS 15454 SDH can set up a point-to-point (straight) Ethernet circuit as single-card or multicard. Multicard EtherSwitch is limited to STS-6c of bandwidth between two Ethernet circuit points, but allows you to add nodes and cards and create a shared packet ring. Single-card EtherSwitch allows a full STS-12c of bandwidth between two Ethernet circuit points.
Step 1 Select an ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NE and choose
Configuration > NE Explorer
.
Step 2 In the tree view of the
NE Explorer
window, select the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 3 Click the
Identification
tab.
Step 4 If you are building a multicard EtherSwitch point-to-point circuit:
a. In the
Card Mode
field, choose
Multicard EtherSwitch Group
.
b. In the message box, click
OK
.
c. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for each Ethernet card in the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH that will carry the circuit.
Step 5 If you are building a single-card EtherSwitch circuit:
a. In the
Card Mode
field, choose
Single-card EtherSwitch
.
b. In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 6 If you are building a port mapped circuit:
a. In the
Card Mode
field, choose
Port Mapped
.
b. In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 7 Navigate to the other ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint.
Step 8 Repeat Step 1 to Step 7 for the other ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint.
Step 9 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 10 In the Type field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The
Attributes
pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 11 In the
Name
field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 12 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 13 From the
Size
field, choose the size of the circuit.
-
The valid circuit sizes for an Ethernet multicard circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-6c.
-
The valid circuit sizes for an Ethernet single-card circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, and STS-12c.
Step 14 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked.
Step 15 (Optional) Specify the customer information:
Step 16 Click
Next
. The
Source
pane opens.
a. From the
Slot
field, choose the circuit source. Either end node can be the circuit source.
b. When building a multicard EtherSwitch circuit, choose
Ethergroup
from the
Slot
field and click
Next
.
c. When building a single-card EtherSwitch circuit, from the
Slot
field choose the Ethernet card where the single-card EtherSwitch was enabled and click
Next
.
d. When building a circuit in port-mapped mode, from the
Slot
field choose the slot containing the E-series card that you will use for one end of the point-to-point circuit. Choose a port from the
Port
drop-down list and click
Next
.
Step 17 The
Destination
pane opens.
a. From the
Slot
field, choose the circuit destination. Choose the node that is
not
the source.
b. When building a multicard EtherSwitch circuit, choose
Ethergroup
from the
Slot
field and click
Next
.
c. When building a
single-card EtherSwitch
circuit, from the Slot field choose the Ethernet card where the single-card EtherSwitch was enabled and click
Next
.
d. When building a circuit in port-mapped mode, from the
Slot
field choose the slot containing the E-series card that you will use for the other end of the point-to-point circuit. Choose a port from the Port drop-down list and click
Next
. The
VLAN Selection
pane opens.
Step 18 Create the VLAN.
a. Click the
New VLAN
button. The
Define New VLAN
dialog box opens.
b. Assign an easily identifiable name to the VLAN.
c. Assign a VLAN ID.
Note The VLAN ID should be the next available number from 2 to 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN. Each ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user-provisionable VLANs.
d. Click
OK
.
e. Highlight the VLAN name and click the
Add
button to move the available VLAN to the Circuit VLANs list box.
Note A maximum of 509 VLANs are supported on a DCC-connected network.
Step 19 Check the
Enable Spanning Tree
check box to enable spanning tree protection.
Step 20 Click
Next
.
The
Routing Preferences
pane opens.
Step 21 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 22.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 22.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 22 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Graphical
or
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the
Available Spans
list. The
Add
option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the
VCAT Member Number
list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the
Available Spans
area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the
Selected Spans
area, select a span from the
Selected Spans
list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 23 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the
Available Links
drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the
Selected Spans
field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 24 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Graphical
or
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the
Graphical Enhanced
radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the
Selected Node/Link
field.
d. Right-click the line, and click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Right-click the line, and click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences pane
, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 25 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 26 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
VLANS on the circuit
-
ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included in the circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 27 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 28
P
rovision the Ethernet ports and assign ports to VLANs. For information about changing the slot properties, see Ethernet Cards. For information about assigning ports to VLANs, see E-Series Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D). For information about provisioning circuits manually, see E-Series Ethernet Manual Cross-Connects.
Provisioning E-Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuits
Step 1 Select an ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NE in the
Domain Explorer
and choose
Configuration > NE Explorer
.
Step 2 In the tree view of the
NE Explorer
window, select the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 3 Click the
Identification
tab.
Step 4 In the
Card Mode
field, choose
Multicard EtherSwitch Group
.
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5 for each Ethernet card in the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH that will carry the shared packet ring.
Step 7 Navigate to the other ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH endpoint.
Step 8 Repeat Step 2 to Step 7 for the other ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH endpoint.
Step 9 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 10 In the
Type
field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The Attributes pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 11 In the
Name
field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 12 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 13 From the Size field, choose the size of the circuit. For shared packet ring Ethernet, valid circuit sizes are STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-6c.
Step 14 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked.
Note When building a shared packet ring configuration, the circuits must be provisioned manually.
Step 15 Click
Next
. The Source pane opens.
Step 16 From the Slot field, choose the circuit source. Any shared packet ring node can serve as the circuit source.
Step 17 Choose
Ethergroup
from the Slot field and click
Next
. The Destination pane opens.
Step 18 Choose the circuit destination from the Slot field. Except for the source node, any shared packet ring node can serve as the circuit destination.
Step 19 Choose
Ethergroup
from the Slot field and click
Next
. The VLAN Selection pane opens.
Step 20 Create the VLAN.
a. Click the
New VLAN
button. The
Define New VLAN
dialog box opens.
b. Assign an easily identifiable name to the VLAN.
c. Assign a VLAN ID.
Note The VLAN ID number must be unique. It should be the next available number from 2 to 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN. Each ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user-provisionable VLANs.
d. Click
OK
.
e. Highlight the VLAN name and click the
Add
button to move the VLAN from the Available VLANs column to the Circuit VLANs list box. When you move the VLAN from the Available VLANs column to the Circuit VLANs column, all of the VLAN traffic is forced to use the shared packet ring circuit that was created.
Step 21 Click
Next
.
Step 22 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 23.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 23.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Note If you selected VT as the circuit type in the Attributes pane and unchecked Route Automatically, the new VT tunnel is created when circuit provisioning is finished.
Step 23 In the Manual Provisioning pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 24 In the Manual Provisioning pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 25 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 26 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 27 In the Review Route pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify that the new circuit is configured correctly.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 28 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 29 Provision the Ethernet ports and assign ports to VLANs. For information about changing the slot properties, see Ethernet Cards. For information about assigning ports to VLANs, see E-Series Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D).
Provisioning E-Series Hub-and-Spoke Ethernet Circuits
This section provides steps for creating a hub-and-spoke Ethernet circuit configuration. The hub-and-spoke configuration connects point-to-point circuits (the spokes) to an aggregation point (the hub). In many cases, the hub links to a high-speed connection and the spokes are Ethernet cards.
Step 1 Select an ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NE and choose
Configuration > NE Explorer
.
Step 2 In the tree view of the
NE Explorer
window, select the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 3 Click the
Identification
tab.
Step 4 Under
Card Mode
, choose
Single-card EtherSwitch
and click
Apply
.
Step 5 Navigate to the other ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH endpoint and repeat Step 2 to Step 4.
Step 6 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 7 From the Type field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The Attributes pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 8 In the Name field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 9 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 10 From the Size field, choose the size of the circuit.
Step 11 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked and click
Next
. The Source pane opens.
Step 12 Choose the circuit source. Either end node can be the circuit source.
Step 13 From the Slot field, choose the Ethernet card where the single-card EtherSwitch was enabled and click
Next
. The Destination pane opens.
Step 14 Choose the circuit destination. Choose the node that is
not
the source.
Step 15 From the Slot field, choose the Ethernet card where the single-card EtherSwitch was enabled and click
Next
. The VLAN Selection pane opens.
Step 16 Create the VLAN.
a. Click the
New VLAN
button. The
Define New VLAN
dialog box opens.
b. Assign an easily identifiable name to the VLAN.
c. Assign a VLAN ID.
Note The VLAN ID number must be unique. It should be the next available number from 2 to 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN. Each ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user-provisionable VLANs.
d. Click
OK
.
e. Highlight the VLAN name and click the
Add
button to move the VLAN from the Available VLANs column to the Circuit VLANs column.
Step 17 Click
Next
. The
Routing Preferences
pane opens.
Step 18 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if Route Automatically is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 19.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 19.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 19 In the Manual Provisioning pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 20 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 21 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 22 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 23 In the Review Route pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
VLANs that will be transported across this circuit
-
ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included on this circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 24 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 25 Provision the second circuit and attach it to the already created VLAN.
Step 26 Provision the Ethernet ports and assign ports to VLANs. For information about changing the slot properties, see Ethernet Cards. For information about assigning ports to VLANs, see E-Series Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D).
E-Series Ethernet Manual Cross-Connects
ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, and ONS 15454 SDH NEs
r
equire end-to-end CTC visibility between nodes
for normal provisioning of E
thernet
circuits. W
hen equipment from other vendors is positioned between ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NEs, equipment
based on O
SI/TARP does not allow tunneling of the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH TCP/IP-based DCC. To circumvent this lack of continuous DCC,
the E
thernet
circuit must be manually cross-connected to an S
TS channel
riding through the non-ONS network. This allows an Ethernet circuit to run from ONS node to ONS node by utilizing the non-ONS network.
Note Provisioning manual cross-connects for multicard EtherSwitch circuits is a separate procedure from provisioning manual cross-connects for single-card EtherSwitch circuits. Both procedures are provided in the following sections.
Provisioning a Single-Card EtherSwitch Manual Cross-Connect
Step 1 Select an ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NE in the
Domain Explorer
and choose
Configuration > NE Explorer
.
Step 2 In the tree view of the
NE Explorer
window, select the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 3 Click the
Identification
tab.
Step 4
In
Card Mode
field, choose
Single-card EtherSwitch
and click
Apply
.
Step 5 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 6
From the
Type
field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The
Attributes
pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 7 In the Name field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 8 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 9
From the
Size
field, choose the size of the circuit. The valid circuit sizes for an Ethernet single-card circuit are STS-1, STS-3c and STS-6c.
Step 10
Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked and click
Next
. The Source pane opens.
Step 11
Choose the current node as the circuit source.
Step 12
From the Slot field, choose the Ethernet card that will carry the circuit and click
Next
. The Destination pane opens.
Step 13
Choose the current node as the circuit destination.
Step 14
From the Slot field, choose the optical card that will carry the circuit.
Step 15
Choose the STS that will carry the circuit from the STS field and click
Next
. The VLAN Selection pane opens.
Note For Ethernet manual cross-connects, the same node serves as both source and destination.
Step 16
Create the VLAN.
a.
Click the
New VLAN
button. The
Define New VLAN
dialog box opens
.
b.
Assign an easily identifiable name to the VLAN.
c.
Assign a VLAN ID.
Note The VLAN ID should be the next available number from 2 to 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN. Each ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user-provisionable VLANs.
d.
Click
OK
.
e.
Highlight the VLAN name and click the
Add
button to move the VLAN from the Available VLANs column to the Circuit VLANs column.
Step 17
Click
Next
. The
Routing Preferences
pane opens.
Step 18 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 19.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 19.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 19 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 20 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 21 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 22 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 23 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
VLANs on this circuit
-
ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included on this circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 24 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 25
P
rovision the Ethernet ports and assign ports to VLANs. For information about changing the slot properties, see Ethernet Cards. For information about assigning ports to VLANs, see E-Series Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D).
Step 26
After assigning the ports to the VLANs, repeat
Step 1
to
Step 25
at the second
ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH
Ethernet manual cross-connect endpoint.
Note The appropriate STS circuit must exist in the non-ONS 15454 SONET equipment to connect the two STSs from the ONS 15454 SONET Ethernet manual cross-connect endpoints.
Caution If a CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears on an Ethernet manual cross-connect,
the two Ethernet circuits might have a circuit-size mismatch. For example, a circuit size of STS-3c might have been configured on the first ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH, and a circuit
size of STS-12c might have been configured on the second ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH
. To troubleshoot the CARLOSS alarm, see the CARLOSS alarm troubleshooting procedure in the “Alarm Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide or
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.
Provisioning an E-Series Multicard EtherSwitch Manual Cross-Connect
Step 1 Select an ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH NE in the
Domain Explorer
and choose
Configuration > NE Explorer
.
Step 2 In the tree view of the
NE Explorer
window, select the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet circuit endpoint nodes.
Step 3 Click the
Identification
tab.
Step 4 In the
Card Mode
field, choose
Multicard EtherSwitch Group
and click
Apply
.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for each Ethernet card in the ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH that will carry the circuit.
Step 6 Do the following in the
Domain Explorer
:
a. Select the source circuit.
b. Choose
Configuration > Create Circuit
.
c. Select the destination circuit. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens.
Step 7 From the Type field, choose
STS
; then, click
Next
. The Attributes pane opens.
Note The VT and VT Tunnel types do not apply to Ethernet circuits.
Step 8 In the Name field, enter a name for the circuit.
Step 9 In the
Circuit Alias
field, enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
Step 10 From the Size field, choose the size of the circuit. The valid circuit sizes for an Ethernet multicard circuit are STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-6c.
Step 11 Verify that the
Bidirectional
check box is checked and click
Next
. The Source pane opens.
Step 12 Choose the current node as the circuit source.
Step 13 Choose
Ethergroup
f
rom the Slot field and click
Next
. The Destination pane opens.
Step 14 Choose the current node as the circuit destination.
Step 15 Choose the Ethernet card that will carry the circuit from the Slot field and click
Next
. The VLAN Selection pane opens.
Note For the Ethernet manual cross-connect, the destination and source should be the same node.
Step 16 Create the VLAN.
a. Click the
New VLAN
button. The Define New VLAN dialog box opens.
b. Assign an easily identifiable name to the VLAN.
c. Assign a VLAN ID.
Note The VLAN ID should be the next available number from 2 to 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN. Each ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user-provisionable VLANs.
d. Click
OK
.
e. Highlight the VLAN name and click the
Add
button to move the VLAN from the Available VLANs column to the Circuit VLANs column.
Step 17 Click
Next
. The
Routing Preferences
pane opens.
Step 18 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. Time Slot Restriction—If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Member Preferences table > Time Slot Restriction field. The STS/VC4 values that you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical, or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
e. Set the circuit path protection as follows:
-
To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default) and proceed to the next substep. A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist.
-
To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
and go to Step 19.
-
To route the circuit on an MS-SPRing protection channel, uncheck
Fully Protected Path
, check
Protection Channel Access
, and go to Step 19.
f. If you selected
Fully Protected Path
, choose one of the following options:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
-
Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred; however, if node diversity is not possible, link-diverse paths are created for the extended SNCP mesh network portion of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP mesh network portions of the complete circuit path are needed.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—Provisions the circuit in a DRI topology. If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 19 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 20 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 21 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 22 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 23 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, verify the following information about the point-to-point circuit:
-
Circuit name
-
Circuit type
-
Circuit size
-
VLANs on this circuit
-
ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH nodes are included on this circuit
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 24 In the message box, click
OK
.
Step 25 Provision the Ethernet ports and assign ports to VLANs. For information about changing the slot properties, see Ethernet Cards. For information about assigning ports to VLANs, see E-Series Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D). Return to Step 26 of this procedure after assigning the ports to VLANs.
Step 26 Highlight the circuit and click
Edit
. The
Edit Circuit
dialog box opens.
Step 27 Click
Drops
; then, click
Create
. The
Define New Drop
dialog box opens.
Step 28 From the
S
lot field, choose the optical card that links the ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH to the non-ONS 15454 equipment.
Step 29 From the Port field, choose the appropriate port.
Step 30 From the
STS
field, choose the STS that matches the STS of the connecting non-ONS 15454 equipment.
Step 31 Click
OK
. The
Edit Circuit
dialog box opens.
Step 32 Confirm the circuit information that is displayed in the
Circuit Information
dialog box and click
Close
.
Step 33 Repeat Step 1 to Step 32 at the second ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet manual cross-connect endpoint.
Note The appropriate STS circuit must exist in the non-ONS 15454 equipment to connect the two ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet manual cross-connect endpoints.
Caution If a
CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears on an Ethernet manual cross-connect,
the two Ethernet circuits might have a circuit-size mismatch. For example, a circuit size of STS-3c might have been configured on the first ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH, and a circuit
size of STS-12c might have been configured on the second ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH
. To troubleshoot the CARLOSS alarm, see the CARLOSS alarm troubleshooting procedure in the “Alarm Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.
Creating a BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI Circuit Automatically
The
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
feature allows you to provision a circuit in a DRI topology to provide the required protection when transitioning traffic between two rings, where at least one ring is a BLSR or MS-SPRing.
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the Type pane, choose
VC_HO_Path_Circuit
for SDH circuits or
STS
for SONET circuits. In the Number of Circuits field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the Attributes pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—Select the circuit size. VC high-order path circuits can be VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC4-64c for optical cards and for some Ethernet cards (depending on the card type). Of the Ethernet cards, only the G-1000 can use VC4-3c, VC4-8c, and VC4-16c. The “c” indicates concatenated VC4s.
-
Bidirectional—Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
Note Prime Optical currently provisions unidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits following the GR-1400 standard. For bidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits, you can check the Provision working go and return on primary path check box to route the working and protect paths in one direction following the ITU-T G.841 standard. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected by this new routing, and the shortest path is always used as the working path.
-
SNCP path selector defaults—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the Source pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Source
if you want to create an SNCP bridge/selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the Destination pane, set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Destination
if you want to create a circuit destination point for unidirectional/bidirectional circuits.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
Check the Route Automatically check box.
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links. You can specify the required nodes and links using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
c. Check the
Review Route Before Creation
check box to review the route before it is created. You can review the route using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
d. To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default). A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist. When you select
Fully Protected Path
, Required is selected automatically.
e. Check the
Dual Ring Interconnect
check box.
Step 10 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Textual radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route. The
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Check the
Use RIP bandwidth on secondary path
check box to use RIP protection for the BLSR or MS-SPRing DRI circuit. Click
OK
. The information you specified in the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box is shown in the
Route Constraints
pane, in the
Included Links/Nodes
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 14 After clicking Next, if you did not check the Revertive check box in the Attributes pane, a dialog box opens with the message “This Circuit Is Configured As Non-Revertive.” If you do not want to specify reversion settings, click
OK
without filling in the fields in the dialog box. If you want to specify reversion settings, check the
Revertive
check box, specify the reversion time in 0.5-minute increments, and click
OK
.
Step 15 In the
Review Route
pane, review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Review the span information.
Step 16 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating a BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI Circuit Manually
The BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI feature allows you to provision a circuit in a DRI topology to provide the required protection when transitioning traffic between two rings, where at least one ring is a BLSR or MS-SPRing.
Step 1 Select a node for which to create a circuit, and open the
Create Circuit
wizard. For an explanation of wizard launch points, see Table 7-3.
Step 2 In the Type pane, choose
VC_HO_Path_Circuit
for SDH circuits or
STS
for SONET circuits. In the Number of Circuits field, enter the number of circuits you want to create. The default is 1. If you enter a number higher than 1, you can use autoranging to create the additional circuits automatically.
Step 3 Click
Next
.
Step 4 In the Attributes pane, enter the following information; then, click
Next
:
-
Name—Enter a unique name for the new circuit. The circuit name is a free-format string of up to 48 ASCII characters. If you leave the field blank, Prime Optical assigns a default name to the circuit.
-
Circuit Alias—Enter a unique alias name for the new circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
-
Description—Enter a circuit description of up to 256 characters.
-
Size—Select the circuit size. VC high-order path circuits can be VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC4-64c for optical cards and for some Ethernet cards (depending on the card type). Of the Ethernet cards, only the G-1000 can use VC4-3c, VC4-8c, and VC4-16c. The “c” indicates concatenated VC4s.
-
Bidirectional—Check this check box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit.
-
State—Specify the circuit state. Options vary depending on the type of circuit selected.
-
Apply to source/destination ports—Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
-
Protected Drops—Check this check box if you want the circuit routed to protected drops only; that is, to cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1 protection.
-
Provision working go and return on primary path (bidirectional UPSR/SNCP protection only)—Check this check box to provision the working path to go and return to the primary path.
Note Prime Optical currently provisions unidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits following the GR-1400 standard. For bidirectional SNCP/UPSR circuits, you can check the Provision working go and return on primary path check box to route the working and protect paths in one direction following the ITU-T G.841 standard. Unidirectional UPSR/SNCP circuits are not affected by this new routing, and the shortest path is always used as the working path.
-
SNCP path selector defaults—If the circuit will be routed on an SNCP node, set the defaults as follows:
– Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect path.
– Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that elapses before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared. (The Cisco default reversion time is 5 minutes.)
– SF threshold—Choose from 1 E-3, 1 E-4, or 1 E-5.
– SD threshold—Choose from 1 E-5, 1 E-6, 1 E-7, 1 E-8, or 1 E-9.
– Switch on PDI-P—Not applicable.
-
Customer ID (optional)—Identify the end user of the circuit.
-
Service ID (optional)—Enter the service ID of the circuit.
Step 5 In the Source pane, set the circuit source. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Source
if you want to create an SNCP bridge/selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP.
Step 6 Click
Next
.
Step 7 In the Destination pane, set the circuit destination. The options displayed depend on the circuit type, the circuit properties selected in the Attributes pane, and the cards installed in the node. Click
Use Secondary Destination
if you want to create a circuit destination point for unidirectional/bidirectional circuits.
Step 8 Click
Next
.
Step 9 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Uncheck the
Route Automatically
check box to disable automatic route selection. If disabled, you can specify the spans associated with the circuit. You can manually provision the circuit using one of the following views:
-
Graphical
-
Graphical Enhanced
-
Textual
b. To route the circuit on a protected path, leave the
Fully Protected Path
check box checked (default). A fully protected circuit route is created based on the path diversity option you choose. Fully protected paths might or might not have SNCP path segments with primary and alternate paths. The path diversity options apply only to SNCP path segments, if any exist. When you select
Fully Protected Path
, Required is selected automatically.
c. Check the
Dual Ring Interconnect
check box.
Step 10 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. Use the map view to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected. Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
-
Add—Allows you to add the selected span. Right-click a link and choose
Add
in the right-click menu. The selected link is added to the Available Spans list. The Add option applies to manual provisioning across all circuit types.
d. In the VCAT Member Number list box, select the member for which the route is to be selected.
e. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
f. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
g. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
h. Repeat substeps
d
to
f
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
i. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each member until all members are routed.
j. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
k. (For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) In the BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab, click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 11 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked and the
Textual
radio button is selected), do the following; then, click Next:
a. Specify the following:
-
Src NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Dest NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Current NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Adj NE ID—
Display only
.
-
Available Links—Lists all links between the currently selected and adjacent NEs. Choose a link from the drop-down list.
-
Available Spans—After you choose a link from the Available Links drop-down list, its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field.
-
Selected Spans—Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field.
b. Click Next Hop to specify the next intermediate hop; then, repeat substep
a
.
c. Click Reset to reset all hop information to the default values.
d. Click Alternate
Route
to specify hop information for the alternate circuit route.
Step 12 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the Graphical or Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Specify the spans that will route to the circuit. Prime Optical starts at the source node. The next NE associated with each span is also displayed. Complete the following substeps:
a. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select one of the following top-level view types from the Selected View Type list:
-
Subnetwork—Allows you to view the subnetwork(s) to which the NEs belong. This is the default view type.
-
Group—Allows you to view the group(s) to which the NEs belong.
The
Current View
field is set to
Top
.
b. (Applicable if the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected) Select a detailed view type from the Available Views list, or right-click a subnetwork or group and choose View. The
Current View
field is set to the detailed view type that you selected.
In a complex network, it might take several minutes or longer to calculate and display the graphic objects in the map view. The progress bar at the top of the map tracks the percentage of completion while the map is updated.
c. In the circuit display, select the node or link. The NE ID or link ID is displayed in the Selected Node/Link field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
c
to
g
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. (Optional) Repeat substeps
c
to
h
for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
j. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Note If the Graphical Enhanced radio button is selected and you want to change the top-level view type at any time, click Top View. The map view reverts to the default Subnetwork view type.
Step 13 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available when
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are enabled and the
Textual
radio button is selected), specify the nodes or links to include in each hop of the circuit route. Complete the following substeps:
a. Select Nodes in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add nodes to your circuit route; then, specify the node information in the
Select Nodes
area.
b. Select Links in the
Select Nodes/Links
area if you want to add links to your circuit route; then, specify the link information in the
Select Links
area.
c. Click Add to add a BLSR-DRI or MS-SPring-DRI to the circuit route. The
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Check the
Use RIP bandwidth on secondary path
check box to use RIP protection for the BLSR or MS-SPRing DRI circuit. Click
OK
. The information you specified in the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box is shown in the
Route Constraints
pane, in the
Included Links/Nodes
field.
d. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the Included Links/Nodes list.
e. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
f. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
g. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
h. Repeat substeps
a
to
e
for each node or link that you want to include in the circuit route.
i. Click
Finish
, or, if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked in the
Routing Preferences
pane, click
Next
.
Step 14 After clicking Finish, if you did not check the Revertive check box in the Attributes pane, a dialog box opens with the message “This Circuit Is Configured As Non-Revertive.” If you do not want to specify reversion settings, click
OK
without filling in the fields in the dialog box. If you want to specify reversion settings, check the
Revertive
check box, specify the reversion time in 0.5-minute increments, and click
OK
.
Step 15 In the message box, click
OK
.
Modifying Circuits on CTC-Based NEs
Use the
Modify Circuit
dialog box to modify properties of an existing circuit.
Step 1 Select the node that contains the circuit to be modified and open the Circuit table.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit to be modified and choose
Configuration > Modify Circuit
(or click the
Modify
tool). The
Modify Circuit
dialog box opens.
The tabs shown in the
Modify Circuit
dialog box depend on the type of circuit selected.
Table 7-7
provides descriptions.
Table 7-7 Field Descriptions for the Modify Circuit Dialog Box
|
|
|
Circuit ID
|
Enter a new circuit ID.
|
Circuit Alias
|
Enter a new alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
|
Description
|
Enter a new description of the selected circuit.
|
Customer ID
|
Optional text field that displays the customer ID of the circuit. The customer ID can contain 0 to 256 alphanumeric and special characters.
For VCAT member circuits, the Customer ID and Service ID fields are disabled. You cannot edit the customer ID or service ID for individual VCAT member circuits; rather, the individual circuits inherit this information from the parent VCAT circuit.
The customer ID of the VCAT circuit is applied to all member circuits. When the Customer ID field is changed for the parent VCAT circuit, the new value is applied to all members.
The Customer ID text field is disabled in the VCAT Member Circuit Edit area. You can still edit the member circuit ID (Name), Description, and Circuit Admin State.
When a new VCAT member circuit is added, the parent VCAT circuit’s customer ID is also applied to the new member circuit.
|
Service ID
|
Optional text field that displays a service ID of the selected circuit. The service ID can contain 0 to 256 alphanumeric and special characters.
For VCAT member circuits, the Customer ID and Service ID fields are disabled. You cannot edit the customer ID or service ID for individual VCAT member circuits; rather, the individual circuits inherit this information from the parent VCAT circuit.
The service ID of the VCAT circuit is applied to all member circuits. When the Service ID field is changed for the parent VCAT circuit, the new value is applied to all members.
The Service ID text field is disabled in the VCAT Member Circuit Edit area. You can still edit the member circuit ID (Name), Description, and Circuit Admin State.
When a new VCAT member circuit is added, the parent VCAT circuit’s service ID is also applied to the new member circuit.
|
Circuit Service State
|
Display only
. The circuit service state is an aggregate of the cross-connect states within the circuit. SONET, SDH, and DWDM circuits have different values; see
Table 7-2
.
|
Circuit Admin State
|
Specify the administrative state to set for the selected circuit. SONET and SDH circuits have different values. For SONET circuits, values are:
-
IS (In Service)—The circuit is in service and able to carry traffic.
-
IS AINS (In Service-Auto In Service)—Alarm reporting is suppressed, but the circuit is able to carry traffic.
-
OOS DSBLD (Out of Service–Disabled)—The circuit is Out of Service and unable to carry traffic.
-
OOS MT (Out of Service–Maintenance)—The circuit is in maintenance state. The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit.
-
OOS OOG (Out of Service–Out of Group)—The VCAT member cross-connection is no longer used for carrying VCAT group traffic, but the cross-connection still exists.
-
No Change
For SDH circuits, corresponding values are:
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,autoInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
-
No Change
|
Apply to source/
destination ports, if allowed
|
Check this check box to apply the selected state to the source and destination ports.
|
Routing Preferences
(VCAT circuits only)
|
Display only
. Indicates the type of routing for VCAT member circuits:
-
Common Route—Each member circuit in the selected VCAT circuit is routed on the same fiber.
-
Split Route—Member circuits are routed on separate paths.
|
VCAT Attributes
(VCAT circuits only)
|
Display only
. Displays the attributes that have been assigned to the selected VCAT circuit, including:
-
Node—Node name.
-
VCG Name—Virtual concatenation group name.
-
Mode—Circuit mode (None, SW-LCAS, or LCAS).
-
No. of Members—Number of members that have been configured for the VCAT circuit.
|
|
Select Monitor Sources
|
Select a circuit monitor source from the list. Click
Create Monitors
to create a new monitor source for the circuit.
|
Drops (Unidirectional and stitched Ethernet circuits only)
|
Drops
|
Displays the list of circuit drops. By default, the drop list has only one original destination point of the circuit. You can create additional drop points to avoid excessive traffic in the circuit.
Follow these steps to create an additional drop point:
1. Click Create to open the
Create Drop
wizard.
2. Select a drop from the
Destination
panel.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Finish in the Routing Preference Panel.
The following message appears in the dialog box. Click OK.
Successfully submitted circuit creation request.
Note Verify that the new drop point has been added in the Circuit table.
Follow these steps to delete a drop point:
1. Select a drop from the Destination panel.
2. Click Delete.
The following message appears in the dialog box. Click Yes.
Deleting drops may be service affecting. Really delete the selected drops?
Note Ensure that the Delete button is disabled only if one destination point is listed.
|
Nodes (Stitched Ethernet circuits only)
|
Nodes
|
Displays the source nodes of the selected circuit. Select a node and click
Remove
to remove the node from the circuit. Click
Add
to open the Add Circuit Node window, where you can add a new node as a source NE.
|
VLANs (E-series cards in single-card and multicard mode only)
|
Available VLANs
|
Displays the list of available VLANs. Select one or more VLANs and click
Add
to add them to the Circuit VLANs field. Click
New VLAN
to open the Define New VLAN window, where you can enter a name and ID for a new VLAN for the selected circuit.
|
Circuit VLANs
|
Displays the list of selected VLANs. Select one or more VLANs and click
Remove
to remove them from the Circuit VLANs field. If the Circuit VLANs list is empty, Prime Optical assigns the default VLAN.
|
Enable Spanning Tree
|
Check this check box to enable spanning tree protection for the circuit.
|
UPSR, SNCP (UPSR is for CTC-based SONET protected circuits, SNCP is for CTC-based SDH protected circuits)
Note UPSR and SNCP attributes are editable only for VCAT member circuits, not for the VCAT parent circuit.
|
Node ID
|
Displays the name of the node.
|
Working Path
|
One of the two paths entering the selector function. In a revertive system, this is the preferred path. In a nonrevertive system, this is the path that is specified as the working path.
|
Protect Path
|
One of the two paths entering the selector function. In a revertive system, this is the nonpreferred path. In a nonrevertive system, this is the path that is not specified as the working path.
|
Reversion Time
|
Controls whether traffic reverts to the working path when conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If you choose Never, traffic does not revert. Choosing a time sets the amount of time that elapses before traffic reverts to the working path.
|
SF BER Level
|
(STS and VC4 circuits only) Sets the UPSR SF BER threshold.
|
SD BER Level
|
(STS and VC4 circuits only) Sets the UPSR SD BER threshold.
|
PDI-P
|
(STS and VC4 circuits only) When checked, traffic switches if an STS payload defect indication is received.
|
Switch State
|
Switches circuit traffic between the working and protect paths. The color of the Working Path and Protect Path fields indicates the active path (the path selected at an exit node) versus the standby path (the path not selected at an exit node). Normally, the working path is green and the protect path is purple. If the protect path is green, working traffic has switched to the protect path.
-
CLEAR—Removes a previously set switch command.
-
LOCKOUT OF PROTECT—Prevents traffic from switching to the protect circuit path under any circumstances. Of all switch states, LOCKOUT has the highest priority.
-
LOCKOUT OF WORKING—Prevents traffic from switching to the working circuit path under any circumstances. Of all switch states, lockout has the highest priority.
-
FORCE TO WORKING—Forces traffic to switch to the working circuit path, even if the path has SD or SF conditions. FORCE switch states have a higher priority than MANUAL switch.
-
FORCE TO PROTECT—Forces traffic to switch to the protect circuit path, even if the path has SD or SF conditions. FORCE switch states have a higher priority than MANUAL switch.
-
MANUAL TO WORKING—Switches traffic to the working circuit path if the path has an error rate less than the SD.
-
MANUAL TO PROTECT—Switches traffic to the protect circuit path if the path has an error rate less than the SD.
Caution The FORCE and LOCKOUT commands override normal protection switching mechanisms. Applying these commands incorrectly can cause traffic outages.
|
Hold Off Time
|
(DRI path selectors only) Sets the hold off time. Values are 0 to 10000 milliseconds, in increments of 100 milliseconds.
|
Use the tabs in the
Modify Circuit
dialog box as follows:
-
Use the
General
tab to edit the circuit ID and circuit description.
-
Use the
Monitor
tab to create monitors for the source drops. Select a drop in the Select Monitor Sources list and click
Create Monitors
. The
Create Circuit
wizard opens, with the source node and drops preset. See Creating an STS (Including Ethernet), STS-V, VT, VT-V, VT Tunnel, or VT Aggregation Circuit to create a new circuit.
-
Use the
Drops
tab to create multiple drops on existing unidirectional circuits. This feature is used to support different types of applications that could be routed from the same source to different destinations (video, voice, and so on). The multiple drops are provisioned on the destination side of the circuit. The source drop remains the same. In the Drops tab, select the required drops and click
Create
to provision a multidrop circuit. Make the selections and click
OK
.
-
Use the
UPSR
tab to edit UPSR selector attributes.
Note UPSR selectors can be edited on a circuit basis, but not on a span basis.
-
Use the
Nodes
tab to add or delete nodes in multicard Ethernet circuits. Select a node from the list and click
Add
or
Remove
.
-
Use the
VLANs
tab to edit VLANs for a VLAN-capable circuit.
Note If you make a mistake while editing VLANs, click the Reset button. This clears the selections entered, and you can restart the VLAN selection.
Step 3 Click
Apply
. (If the Apply button is not visible, proceed to Step 4.)
Step 4 Click
Close
.
Changes are visible in the Circuit table after the window has been refreshed.
Summary of Edit Circuit Options
Table 7-8
summarizes the options to edit circuits.
Table 7-8 Summary of Edit Circuit Options
|
|
|
|
All
|
Edit circuit ID, description, state, customer ID, and service ID
|
All
|
Change the circuit ID, but the ID must be unique. The description can contain up to 256 characters.
|
STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT and VT/VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT in a UPSR ring
|
Change UPSR/SNCP selector attributes
|
Unidirectional and bidirectional
|
Change UPSR/SNCP selector attributes for STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT and VT/VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT bidirectional circuits.
|
STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT
|
Add drops
|
Unidirectional STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT and unidirectional VT/VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT
|
Add a drop and verify it in the Prime Optical database or in the Circuit table.
|
Add drops to Ethernet circuits
|
Bidirectional STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT
|
Add a drop and verify it in the Prime Optical database or in the Circuit table.
|
Add monitor circuits to STS circuits
|
Bidirectional STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT
|
Monitor circuits must be unidirectional. Create a maximum of four monitor circuits for each STS circuit.
|
Add nodes to multicard Ethernet circuits
|
Multicard circuits
|
—
|
Add VLANs to Ethernet circuits
|
Bidirectional STS/VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT
|
Associate VLANs with the circuit and verify.
|
SDH circuits
|
Add monitor circuits
|
Bidirectional VC LO path tunnel
|
—
|
Updating Circuits
You must update circuits after adding nodes to the network.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs
> Update Circuit
. A message appears, stating that Prime Optical has successfully updated the circuit.
Step 2 Click
OK
.
Merging Circuits
Use the circuit merge feature to merge different circuits into one or more new circuits. This feature enables you to merge many circuits (including TL1 and OCHNC DCN circuits), thereby ensuring that the aligned sections are spliced into one circuit.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select a circuit; this circuit will be the master circuit.
Step 3 Choose
Configuration > Merge Table
. The fields in the Circuit Merge table are identical to the fields in the Circuit table (Table 7-2). The Circuit Merge table displays the circuits that are path aligned with the master circuit. These circuits are called
slave circuits
. The Circuit Merge table shows circuits (slave circuits) that are the same size as the master circuit.
Note You must merge n selected slave circuits with one selected master circuit. When circuits are merged from Prime Optical, EMS attributes such as customer ID, service ID, description, and comments are retained only for master circuits. If the circuit merge is done through CTC, the EMS attributes are not retained in Prime Optical.
Note Circuits are allowed to merge only if the following conditions exist:
— Their connections are path aligned.
— They have compatible circuit type, size, and direction.
— They do not have different VLAN assignments.
— They do not have different nondefault SLA values.
— They have compatible circuit endpoints.
— They do not form an invalid circuit.
Step 4 To refresh any new aligned circuits with the selected circuit, choose
Configuration > Refresh Lined Up Circuits
(or click the
Refresh Lined Up Circuits
tool).
Step 5 Specify the circuit(s) that you want to merge with the selected circuit and choose
Configuration > Merge
(or click the
Merge
tool).
Step 6 If the selected circuit(s) cannot be merged completely into the current circuit, the following message appears:
The selected circuit(s) cannot be merged completely into the current circuit. Disjointed remnants of the selected circuit(s) might remain after the merge. Click OK to continue.
Step 7 Click
OK
to continue with the merge, or click
Cancel
to cancel the operation.
Reconfiguring Circuits
Use the reconfigure circuit(s) feature to upgrade TL1 circuits to regular circuits.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Circuit Table
.
Step 2 Select the TL1 circuit(s) to reconfigure and choose
Configuration > Reconfigure Circuit(s)
.
Tip Hold down the Shift key to select more than one option sequentially, or hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one option nonsequentially.
Step 3 In the confirmation dialog box, click
OK
.
A progress bar tracks the status of the reconfiguration. A failed or succeeded message displays the results of the reconfiguration. When the operation succeeds, the Circuit Status field in the Circuit table changes from
Discovered-TL1
to
Discovered
.
Note The EMS attributes of the circuits are lost after the circuit reconfiguration.
Repairing Circuits
The Alarm Interface Panel (AIP) provides surge protection for CTC-based NEs. This pane has a nonvolatile memory chip that stores the unique node address known as the MAC address. The MAC address identifies the nodes that support circuits. It allows Prime Optical to determine circuit sources, destinations, and spans. If an AIP fails, an alarm is generated and the LCD display on the fan tray assemblies of the NEs becomes blank. To perform an in-service replacement of the AIP, you must contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). For contact information, visit the TAC website at
http://www.cisco.com/tac
.
You can replace the AIP on an in-service system without affecting traffic by using the circuit repair feature. If the AIP card needs to be replaced, you will need to repair circuits affected by the MAC address change on the NE. Circuit repair will work when all nodes are running the same software version. Each individual AIP replacement requires an individual circuit repair; if AIPs are replaced on two NEs, the circuit repair must be performed twice. Repairing circuits allows you to change the MAC address of all circuits originating at an NE to a user-provided NE ID.
To repair a Prime Optical circuit when an AIP card is changed, restart the Prime Optical server or complete the following steps:
Note • While completing the following steps, do not create or delete any circuits using Prime Optical.
-
The following procedure applies to circuits on CTC-based NEs.
Step 1 See the
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
to replace the AIP card.
Note Reset both Timing Communications and Control (TCC) cards after the AIP card is replaced.
Step 2 In the
Domain Explorer
, choose
Administration > Control Panel
.
Step 3 Expand
NE Service
.
Step 4 Select
CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs
and deactivate the network service. Click
Save
.
Step 5 Activate the network service again and click
Save
.
Step 6 In the
Domain Explorer
, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Repair Circuit
. The
Repair Circuit
dialog box opens.
The
Repair Circuit
dialog box allows you to change the MAC address of all circuits originating at the selected NE with a user-provided NE ID. MAC addresses are a subset of data link layer addresses. MAC addresses identify network entities in LANs implementing the IEEE MAC sublayer of the data link layer.
Table 7-9
provides descriptions.
Step 7 After making your selections, click
OK
.
Table 7-9 Field Descriptions for the Repair Circuit Dialog Box
|
|
Old MAC Address
|
Enter the current MAC address of the NE. MAC addresses are 48 bits in length and are expressed as 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-f):
-
The first 6 hexadecimal digits are the manufacturer identification (or vendor code), called the Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI). These 6 digits are administered by the IEEE.
-
The last 6 hexadecimal digits are the interface serial number or another value administered by the specific vendor.
|
New MAC Address
|
Enter the new MAC address of the NE.
|
Deleting Circuits
Use the Circuit table to delete an existing circuit or multiple circuits from the Prime Optical database and remove the associated cross-connections from the NEs.
Note • You cannot delete VT tunnel and VAP circuits that are in use.
-
You cannot delete OCHNC DCN circuits from Prime Optical. If you try to delete an OCHNC DCN circuit, Prime Optical returns the following error message: “Circuit deletion failed. Failed to delete the following circuit(s). Circuit details: You cannot remove a DCN OCHNC circuit from CTM.” You must use CTC to delete OCHNC DCN circuits.
-
You cannot delete OCH trail circuits that are created automatically upon OCHCC circuit creation. OCH trail circuits are removed automatically when the corresponding OCHCC circuit is removed.
Complete the following steps to delete circuits:
Step 1 Select the node that contains the circuit to be deleted and open the Circuit table.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit(s) to be deleted and choose
Configuration > Delete Circuit
(or click the
Delete
tool).
Step 3 (For CTC-based NEs) In the Delete Circuit(s) confirmation box, do the following:
a. Check the
Change drop port admin state
check box.
b. Choose the state of the source or destination port from the drop-down list. For SONET and OCHCC circuits, the available states are:
-
IS (In Service)—The circuit is in service and able to carry traffic.
-
IS,AINS (In Service–Auto In Service)—Alarm reporting is suppressed, but the circuit is able to carry traffic.
-
OOS,DSBLD (Out of Service–Disabled)—The circuit is out of service and unable to carry traffic.
-
OOS,MT (Out of Service–Maintenance)—The circuit is in maintenance state. The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit.
For SDH circuits, the corresponding values are:
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,autoInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
Step 4 Click
Yes
.
Step 5 In the message box, click
OK
.
Note When deleting multiple circuits, if an error occurs during the deletion of a particular circuit, the operation continues with the deletion of the remaining selected circuits.
Viewing Circuit Spans
In the Circuit table, you can select a circuit and choose
Configuration > Open Circuit Span
(or click the
Open Circuit Span
tool). The Circuit Span table opens, showing information about all spans associated with the selected circuit.
Table 7-10
provides descriptions.
Table 7-10 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Span Table
|
|
Circuit Name
|
Displays the name of the selected circuit.
|
Circuit Type
|
Displays the type of circuit that the span belongs to.
|
Circuit Alias
|
Enter a new alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
|
Circuit Size
|
Displays the size of the circuit that the span belongs to.
|
Source Network Element
|
Displays the NE ID of the span source.
|
Source Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the module type at the span source, the slot and port name and numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface).
|
Source State
|
Displays the state of the circuit span according to the source circuit node. Valid values are:
-
Inactive—The circuit is inactive and the segment cannot be used.
-
Stranded—Bandwidth is not available and the segment cannot be used.
-
Routed—Circuit is being routed, but not provisioned, meaning that cross-connects have not been provisioned on the node/TCC.
-
Tentative—Cross-connects have been created on the node, but circuit information is incomplete or has not been updated correctly. This is not a complete circuit.
-
Active—Segment is in use.
|
Destination Network Element
|
Displays the NE ID of the span destination.
|
Destination Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the module type at the span destination, the slot and port numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface).
|
Destination State
|
Displays the state of the circuit span from the destination circuit node point of view. Valid values are Inactive, Stranded, Routed, Tentative, and Active.
|
Span Part of UPSR Ring
|
Indicates whether or not the circuit span is part of a UPSR.
|
Span Part of SNCP Ring
(ONS 15454 SDH only)
|
Indicates whether or not the circuit span is part of an SNCP.
|
Span Active State
|
Indicates whether or not the circuit span carries active traffic.
|
Span Protection State
|
Displays the last successful span protection operation performed on the selected circuit span. Values are Clear, Manual, Force, and Lockout. This field only applies to circuit spans that are part of an SNCP ring.
|
Viewing VLAN Information
For CTC-based NEs, you can select a circuit in the Circuit table and choose
Configuration > VLAN Table
. The VLAN table opens, showing VLAN information associated with the selected circuit.
Table 7-11
provides descriptions.
Table 7-11 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Table
|
|
VLAN ID
|
Displays the numerical ID of the VLAN. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4093.
|
VLAN Name
|
Displays the user-assigned name of the VLAN.
|
Viewing VCAT Member Circuits
Use the VCAT Member table to view members of a VCAT circuit.
Step 1 Select a CTC-based NE in the
Domain Explorer
tree and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, choose
Configuration > Member Circuits
. The VCAT Member table opens.
Table 7-12
provides descriptions.
Table 7-12 Field Descriptions for the VCAT Member Table
|
|
Circuit Name
|
Displays the VCAT member name.
Note If there are multiple circuits with the same name displayed in the Circuit table, the label Duplicate appears in this column.
|
Circuit Alias
|
Displays the alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
|
Note
|
Displays comments that have been entered for the selected VCAT member circuit. Allows you to add additional comments.
|
Source NE—Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the NE ID and module type at the span source, the slot and port name and numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface).
|
Destination NE—Module Type/Physical Loc/Interface
|
Displays the NE ID, the module type at the destination, the slot and port name and numbers (physical location), and the STS number (interface).
|
Circuit Type
|
Displays the type of VCAT member circuit selected. SONET circuit types are STS, VT, VT Aggregation, VT Tunnel, VT VCAT (shown as VT-v), STS VCAT (shown as STS-v), DWDM OCHNC, and DWDM OCHCC.
SDH circuit types are HOP, LOP, LOPA, LOPT, HOV (HO VCAT), LOV (LO VCAT), OCHNC, and OCHCC.
|
Circuit Size
|
Displays the size of the VCAT member circuit.
-
SONET circuit sizes are VT1.5, VT2, STS 1, STS 3c, STS 6c, STS 9c, STS 12c, STS 24c, STS 48c, and STS 192c.
-
SDH circuit sizes are VC11, VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, and VC4-64c.
-
OCHNC circuit sizes are multirate, 2.5 Gb/s FEC, 2.5 Gb/s No FEC, 10 Gb/s FEC, and 10 Gb/s No FEC.
-
OCHCC circuit sizes are STM1, STM4, STM16, STM64, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, 10GE, 1GE, 10GFC, 4GFC, 2GFC, 1GFC, 4GFiCon, 2GFiCon, 1GFiCon, ESCON, ETR-CLO, ISC-PEER, ISC3-PEER-1G, ISC-PEER-2G, ISC-COMPACT, HDVT, SD1/D1, DV6000, or Pass Through.
Note Not all circuit sizes are supported on all NE releases.
|
Circuit Direction
|
Indicates whether the VCAT member circuit carries unidirectional or bidirectional traffic.
|
Customer ID
|
Optional text field that displays the customer ID of the VCAT member circuit.
|
Service ID
|
Optional text field that displays the service ID of the VCAT member circuit.
|
Circuit Status
|
Displays the status of the selected VCAT member circuit:
-
Discovered—The circuit is completely configured in the network; all components are in place and a complete path exists from the circuit source to the circuit destination.
-
Partial—The circuit is not complete; one or more cross-connections are not in place.
-
Creating—Prime Optical is creating the circuit.
-
Deleting—Prime Optical is deleting the circuit.
-
Discovered_TL1—A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like Prime Optical-created circuit is complete and has upgradable cross-connects. A complete path from source to destination(s) exists.
-
Partial_TL1—A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like Prime Optical-created circuit with upgradable cross-connects is missing a cross-connect, and a complete path from source to destination(s) does not exist. The circuit cannot be upgraded until the missing cross-connects are in place.
|
Circuit Service State
|
The circuit service state is an aggregate of the cross-connect states within the circuit. SONET, SDH, and DWDM circuits have different values; see
Table 7-2
.
|
Is Monitor
|
A value of True means that the VCAT member circuit is a monitor circuit. A value of False means that the VCAT member circuit is not a monitor circuit.
|
Circuit Protection Type
|
Indicates the VCAT member circuit protection scheme. Options are:
-
2F BLSR—The circuit is protected by a 2-fiber BLSR.
-
4F BLSR—The circuit is protected by a 4-fiber BLSR.
-
BLSR—The circuit is protected by both 2-fiber and 4-fiber BLSR.
-
UPSR—The circuit is protected by UPSR.
-
DRI—The circuit is protected by a UPSR dual ring interconnection.
-
1+1—The circuit is protected by 1+1 protection group.
-
Y-Cable—The circuit is protected by a transponder or muxponder card Y-cable protection group.
-
Protected—The circuit is protected by diverse SONET topologies; for example, a BLSR and a UPSR, or a UPSR and 1+1.
-
Unprotected—The circuit is not protected.
-
2F-PCA—The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a 2-fiber BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
4F-PCA—The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a 4-fiber BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
PCA—The circuit is routed on a PCA path on both 2-fiber and 4-fiber BLSRs. PCA circuits are unprotected.
-
Unknown—Circuit protection types appear in the Circuit Protection Type column of the Circuit table when the circuit status is Discovered. If the circuit not discovered, the protection type is
Unknown
.
-
Lost—The circuit was protected, but the protection has been lost due to changes in the network.
|
Description
|
Displays the description of the selected VCAT member circuit.
|
No. of VLANs
|
Displays the number of VLANs associated with the VCAT member circuit.
|
Is VCAT or Member Circuit
|
A value of True means that the circuit is a VCAT member circuit.
|
OCHNC Wavelength
|
Indicates the wavelength provisioned for the OCHNC, in nanometers (nm).
|
OCHNC Direction
|
Indicates the direction of the OCHNC. Values are east-to-west or west-to-east.
|
Creating VCAT Member Circuits
Use the
Add Member
wizard to add new members to an existing VCAT or open-ended VCAT circuit.
Note • You can launch the Add Member wizard only for VCAT circuits that allow reconfiguration.
-
VCAT circuits created through TL1 cannot be reconfigured (
Add/Delete Member
) until the parent VCAT circuit is reconfigured (
Configuration > Reconfigure Circuit(s)
in the Circuit table).
-
To specify member endpoints for VCAT circuit endpoints on CE-MR-10 cards, the
Add Member
wizard shows the Endpoint Selection pane (with slot/port/STS, Member Selection button, and a link for circuit creation).
Complete the following steps to create VCAT member circuits:
Step 1 Select a CTC-based NE in the
Domain Explorer
tree and choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, choose
Configuration > Member Circuits
.
Step 3 In the VCAT Member table, choose
Configuration > Add Member
. The
Add Member
wizard opens.
Table 7-13
provides descriptions.
Step 4 In the Add Members pane, specify the number of members to add to the existing VCAT circuit. Choose the administrative state for the new VCAT member circuit. All of the other panes (
Routing Preferences
,
Manual Provisioning
,
Route Constraints
,
Review Route
, and so on) are identical to the
Create Circuit
wizard. (See Table 7-6.)
Step 5 Click
Next
to proceed through the wizard panes. After finalizing your selections, click
Finish
.
Table 7-13 Field Descriptions for the Add Member Wizard
|
|
|
Current Circuit Size
|
Displays the current size of the circuit.
|
Number of Members
|
Enter the number of members to add to the existing VCAT circuit.
|
New Circuit Size
|
Displays the new size of the circuit.
|
State
|
Select an administrative state for the new VCAT member circuit. SONET and SDH circuits have different values. For SONET circuits, values are:
-
IS—The circuit is in service and able to carry traffic.
-
IS AINS—Alarm reporting is suppressed, but the circuit is able to carry traffic.
-
OOS DSBLD—The circuit is out of service and unable to carry traffic.
-
OOS_MT—The circuit is in maintenance state. The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit.
For SDH circuits, corresponding values are:
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked, autoInService
-
Locked, disabled
-
Locked, maintenance
|
Add to Drop Ports
|
Check this check box to apply the selected state to the drop ports.
|
Circuit Summary
|
Summarizes the selections you made in the wizard panes. To change the circuit summary, click
Back
and change your selection(s).
|
Filtering the Circuit Table
Use the Circuit table filter to filter circuit data according to criteria that you select.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the NE for which to view circuit information.
Step 2 From the
Configuration
menu, choose
CTC-Based SONET NEs
,
CTC-Based SDH NEs
; then, choose
Circuit Table
from the submenu. The Circuit table opens, showing circuit information for the selected NE.
Step 3 Choose
File > Filter
(or click the
Filter Data
tool). The Circuit table filter opens.
Table 7-14
provides descriptions. Fields shown depend on the type of NE selected.
Step 4 After making your selections, click
OK
. The filtered circuit data is displayed in the Circuit table.
Table 7-14 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Table Filter Dialog Box
|
|
Circuit Names
|
Displays the list of available circuit names. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move circuit names to and from the Selected Names list. If you check
Ignore Circuit Names
, Prime Optical ignores all circuit names and the Available Names and Selected Names lists and Add and Remove buttons are disabled. This is equivalent to selecting all the names in the Available Names list of the Circuit Names tab.
|
Circuit Alias
|
Enter a new alias name for the circuit. The alias name can contain alphanumeric characters. International character sets are also supported.
|
Type and Size (CTC-based SONET NEs)
|
Allows you to specify the type and size of circuit to display. Select
All
to display circuit data for all Ethernet, STS, VT, VT Aggregation, VT Tunnel, VT VCAT (shown as VT-v), STS VCAT (shown as STS-v), DWDM OCHNC, and DWDM OCHCC circuits.
Select
Size All
to display circuit data for all VT1.5, VT2, STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c, STS-36c, STS-48c, STS-96c, and STS-192c interfaces.
OCHNC and OCHCC sizes (shown only when the OCHNC or OCHCC circuit type is selected, not when the All option is selected) include multirate, 2.5 Gb/s FEC, 2.5 Gb/s No FEC, 10 Gb/s FEC, and 10 Gb/s No FEC.
Note When you select All, all circuit types and sizes for the specific NE model are displayed.
Note When circuit size is selected for filtering circuits, a VCAT circuit will be filtered if the size matches its member circuit size.
|
Type and Size (CTC-based SDH NEs)
|
Allows you to specify the type and size of circuit to display. Select
Type All
to display circuit data for all HOP, LOP, LOPA, LOPT, HOV (HO VCAT), LOV (LO VCAT), OCHNC and OCHCC circuits. Select
Size All
to display circuit data for all VC11, VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c, VC4-16c, VC4-32c, and VC4-64c interfaces.
OCHNC, and OCHCC sizes (shown only when the OCHNC, or OCHCC circuit type is selected, not when the All option is selected) include multirate, 2.5 Gb/s FEC, 2.5 Gb/s No FEC, 10 Gb/s FEC, and 10 Gb/s No FEC.
|
NE ID
|
Displays the list of available NE IDs. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move NEs to and from the Selected NE IDs list, and then run the filter.
|
Links (CTC-based NEs)
|
Displays all available links.
Note If you open the Circuit table from the Find window or the Domain Explorer, the Links tab is disabled. The tab is enabled only if you open the Circuit table from the Link table.
|
Description (CTC-based NEs)
|
Allows you to filter by circuit description.
|
Customer ID
|
Displays a list of available customer IDs. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move customer IDs to and from the Selected Customer IDs list, and then run the filter. If you check
Ignore All Customer IDs
, Prime Optical ignores the customer IDs in the filter criteria.
|
Service ID
|
Displays a list of available service IDs. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move service IDs to and from the Selected Service IDs list, and then run the filter. If you check
Ignore All Service IDs
, Prime Optical ignores the service IDs in the filter criteria.
|
No. of VLANs
|
Displays filter criteria for the VLAN count. Enter the VLAN count in the text box and specify one of the options for comparison: Greater than or equal to, Less than or equal to, or Equal to.
|
SRLG
|
Displays a list of available SRLGs. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move SRLG entries to and from the Selected SRLG Entries list, and then run the filter. If you check
Ignore SRLG
, Prime Optical ignores the SRLGs in the filter criteria.
|
Tracing Circuits
Use the Circuit Trace window to trace the connectivity of a circuit by showing the source node, the destination node, and any intermediate nodes in graphical format. In addition, the Circuit Trace window displays the primary and secondary circuit paths. A circuit trace report is available only for ONS 15305 and CTC-based NEs.
Tracing High-Level Circuits
Prime Optical displays a High-Level Circuit Trace window, where:
-
A graphic map uses high-level span information such as NEs and links to display the circuit trace.
-
The graphic map displays
logical
and
physical
high-level views:
– Logical view—The circuit is traced on the map using logical links. For example, OCHCC circuits use OCH trail links for the trace.
– Physical view—The circuit is traced on the map using physical links. For example, OCHCC circuits use OTS links for the trace.
-
Links are highlighted according to the high-level view that is selected.
-
Link color corresponds to link status. For example, working links are shown in green.
-
The window does not trace the following link types:
– 2-fiber BLSR with protection channel access (PROT_BLSR_2F_PCA)
– 4-fiber BLSR with protection channel access (PROT_BLSR_4F_PCA)
Note Circuit Trace is applicable only to SONET/SDH NE circuits. This functionality is no longer applicable to the DWDM circuits.
To view a high-level circuit trace, complete the following steps:
Step 1 Select the node that contains the circuit to be traced and open the Circuit table.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit to be traced, and choose
Configuration > Trace High-Level Circuit
(or click the
High-Level Trace
tool). The High-Level Circuit Trace window opens. Based on the NEs involved in the circuit, all links that belong to the subnetwork are retrieved and displayed.
Note You cannot trace STS VCAT, VT VCAT, VC HO VCAT, and VC LO VCAT circuits, or circuits with a status other than Active or Roll Pending.
Step 3 By default, the High-Level Circuit Trace window opens with the logical view displayed. Choose
View > WDM Topology
to switch to the physical view. The window highlights the relevant links according to your selection.
Step 4 When multiple links belong to the same NE object, a link bundle is created automatically to manage the set of links. You can right-click a link or link bundle and choose
Expand
or
Collapse
from the shortcut menu. If you choose
Collapse
, the links are hidden and the link bundle is displayed. If you choose
Expand
, the link bundle is hidden and the links are displayed. The color of the link bundle represents the link selection status, which has the following order of priority (from highest to lowest):
-
Magenta—The link bundle contains at least one excluded link.
-
Blue—The link bundle contains at least one selected link.
-
White—The link bundle contains at least one selecting link.
-
Green—All links in the link bundle are selectable.
-
Red—The link bundle contains at least one unselectable link.
Step 5 Position your mouse cursor over a link. The tooltip reports the following information, if available:
-
Link type.
-
Source NE name, slot number, card name, port number, side information.
-
Destination NE name, slot number, card name, port number, side information.
-
Protection type.
Note When you move the cursor over an NE for a high level circuit, the tooltip displays the fiber information for that NE. In case of invalid values such as a different forward and backward lengths, the background of the tooltip is shown in red color.
Step 6 To adjust the zoom level within the map view, do any of the following:
-
Choose Edit > Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Zoom Area.
-
In the toolbar, click the Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Zoom Area tool.
-
Right-click an empty area of the map and choose
Zoom In
,
Zoom Out
, or
Zoom Area
from the popup menu.
The zoom tools work as follows:
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view. This tool increases the size of all of the graphic objects on the map.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view. This tool decreases the size of all of the graphic objects on the map.
-
Zoom Area—Allows you to pan and zoom the view to a different region of the map. Hold down the left mouse button and use the Zoom Area box to highlight an area on the map. When you release the left mouse button, the zoom is applied on the selected area of the map.
Step 7 Click an NE object to open the NE Explorer window for that NE.
Step 8 Choose
View > Detailed View
to open a detailed Circuit Trace window from the current window. For information about the detailed view, see Tracing Detailed Circuits.
Table 7-15
describes the icons in the High-Level Circuit Trace window.
Table 7-15 Object Icon Descriptions for the High-Level Circuit Trace Window
|
|
The color of the NE represents the highest alarm severity on that entity. For icon colors, see Table A-2. The label under the NE icon shows the NE name.
|
|
While the NE is initializing, a small hourglass is shown to the right of the NE. The hourglass icon disappears when the NE state changes to In Service.
|
|
Circuit source, where
n
indicates the source number.
|
|
Circuit destination, where
n
indicates the destination number.
|
|
Solid green link with bidirectional arrows: The link is active and bidirectional, and supports the working (main) span.
|
|
Solid magenta link with bidirectional arrows: The link is active and bidirectional, and supports the protected (standby) span.
|
|
Solid green link with unidirectional arrows: A single arrow in the middle of the link shows the direction of the source or destination.
|
|
Solid magenta link with unidirectional arrows: A single arrow in the middle of the link shows the direction of the source or destination.
|
|
Solid gray link: The link is active but is not directly involved in the circuit.
|
|
Dashed-line link: A dashed line represents an invalid link or a logical link, such as an OCH trail link.
Note: If the logical link is involved in a circuit, the circuit type is shown above the dashed line.
|
|
Dashed-line link that uses triple dots with spacing: While the NE is being discovered, the links are created but might remain invalid. In this case, the link is shown on the map as a dashed line that uses triple dots with spacing.
|
|
The
Refresh Data
tool flashes when updates are available. Or, if the automatic Refresh Data feature is enabled, the High-Level Circuit Trace window refreshes automatically whenever updates occur.
Table 7-16
shows which events prompt a real-time update to the High-Level Circuit Trace window.
Table 7-16 Events that Cause a Real-Time Update to the High-Level Circuit Trace Window
|
|
Add a link
|
The graphic object representing the link is added to the map.
|
Modify a link
|
If the link validity changes, the corresponding graphic object is updated.
|
Delete a link
|
The graphic object representing the link is deleted from the map.
|
Change the NE state to Out of Service
|
The NE icon color changes to gray. All links that belong to the NE are deleted and removed from the map.
|
Change the NE state to In Maintenance
|
The NE icon color changes. All links that belong to the NE are deleted and removed from the map.
|
Change the NE state to In Service
|
The NE icon color reflects the highest alarm severity on that entity, and the hourglass icon disappears. All links that belong to the NE are discovered and shown on the map.
|
Change the NE state to Initializing
|
A small hourglass is shown to the right of the NE while the NE initializes.
|
Change the circuit name
|
The window title updates to show the new circuit name.
|
Delete a circuit
|
A warning message informs you that the circuit has been deleted. Then, the High-Level Circuit Trace window closes automatically.
|
Note If you are trying to trace subnetwork information but there are insufficient map coordinates for the Subnetwork Explorer, the graphic objects are placed randomly on the Circuit Trace window. To fix this problem, open the Subnetwork Explorer map view and click Save to save the graphic objects’ positions.
Tracing Detailed Circuits
In addition to high-level circuit traces, Prime Optical displays detailed circuit traces. To view a detailed circuit trace, complete the following steps:
Step 1 Select the node that contains the circuit to be traced and open one of the following:
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit to be traced, and choose
Configuration > Trace Circuit
(or click the
Trace
tool). The Circuit Trace window opens.
Step 3 In the Link Utilization table, select the circuit to be traced, and choose View > Circuit Trace. The Circuit Trace window opens.
Step 4 In the Circuit Trace window, choose Edit > Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Zoom Area to adjust the zoom level. You can also click the Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Zoom Area tool.
Note Prime Optical traces the connectivity of circuits in Partial state. However, if the source or destination node information is not available during circuit discovery, Prime Optical cannot start the circuit trace and generates an error message.
The following figure shows the color scheme used to represent the port state and alarm status in the Circuit Trace window. The color of the NEs and ports represents the highest alarm severity on that entity.
Figure 7-1 Colors of Port State and Alarm Status
|
|
|
|
|
|
Gray
|
Out of Service
|
OOS_DSBLD
|
—
|
|
Cyan
|
Out of Service–Maintenance
|
OOS_MT
|
—
|
|
Purple
|
In Service
|
IS_AINS
|
—
|
|
Green
|
In Service
|
IS
|
Clear
|
|
Light blue
|
In Service
|
IS
|
Warning
|
|
Yellow
|
In Service
|
IS
|
Minor
|
|
Orange
|
In Service
|
IS
|
Major
|
|
Red
|
In Service
|
IS
|
Critical
|
Note • The administrative state color (OOS_DSBLD, OOS_MT, IS_AINS) overrides the alarm state color.
-
For in-service (IS) ports, the alarm state color overrides the administrative state color.
Table 7-17
describes the icons in the detailed Circuit Trace window.
Table 7-17 Object Icon Descriptions for the Detailed Circuit Trace Window
|
|
Circuit source, where
n
indicates the source number
|
|
Circuit destination, where
n
indicates the destination number
|
|
NE
|
|
Active span
Note: Arrows indicate the direction of traffic flow, with green indicating active traffic.
|
|
Standby span
Note: Arrows indicate the direction of traffic flow, with purple indicating standby traffic.
|
|
PCA, VT tunnel, or VAP span
Note: Each span is tagged with a
Tunnel
,
VAP
, or
PCA
label.
|
|
Rolled path
Note: The rolled path could be the source, the destination, or one or more spans. All entities that have been added to a circuit are shown in orange once the roll is created.
|
|
Port
If there are multiple ports displayed, the ports on the top of the NE icon have a left-right to bottom-top association with the port name.
|
|
Unidirectional circuit
|
|
Bidirectional circuit
|
|
UPSR selector
Note: The color of the UPSR selector represents the switch state. Green indicates that the selector is using the traffic from the working path; purple indicates that the selector is using traffic from the protected path.
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Switched state is
Locked
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Switched state is
Forced
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Switched state is
Manual
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Switched state is
APS clear
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Switched state is
Exercise
|
|
(For UPSR selectors) Provisioning type is
Protected
(PRT)
|
<PTP>Port name<CTP>
(PRT)
|
(For UPSR selectors) Provisioning type is
Working
(WRK)
|
<PTP>Port name<CTP>
(WRK)
|
Internal drop for VT tunnel
|
|
Internal drop for VAP circuit
|
|
Internal drop for Ethernet circuit
|
|
Facility (line) loopback
|
|
Terminal loopback
|
|
Automatic J1 path trace mode
|
|
Manual J1 path trace mode
|
|
Dual Connection Node
|
|
Note Circuit Trace is applicable only to SONET/SDH NE circuits. This functionality is no longer applicable to the DWDM circuits.
The following figure shows a sample circuit diagram that uses many of the objects and icons described in
Table 7-17
.
Figure 7-2 Sample Circuit Diagram
The Circuit Trace window provides tooltips. For each span, the tooltip displays link protection and bandwidth information. If a circuit passes through a VT tunnel, the intermediate nodes through which the VT tunnel passes are displayed and the level of cross-connection is STS-1.
For DRI circuits, DRI nodes are tagged with a
DRI
label.
The Circuit Trace also displays ONS 15600 circuits that are in Roll Pending state. The Roll From circuit path is marked in green and the Roll To circuit path is marked in orange. CTPs that are part of the roll are labeled
RollTo
and
RollFrom
.
Viewing Encryption Details
Prime Optical displays encryption information for Layer 1 services of OCHCC and OCH Trail circuits. Encryption is available for the 10GE LAN PHY, OTU2e, and OTU2 service types. For regeneration sites, the WSE card is available as a regeneration card for the OTU2e service type.
To view encryption, complete the following steps:
Step 1 Select the node that contains the circuit to be traced and open one of the following:
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit to be traced, and choose Configuration > Trace Circuit (or click the Trace tool). The Circuit Trace window opens.
Step 3 In the Link Utilization table, select the circuit to be traced, and choose View > Circuit Trace. The Circuit Trace window opens.
Step 4 To view the Encryption tab, do one of the following:
-
From the Circuit Trace window, choose the Encryption tab.
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Encryption.
The Encryption tab allows you to enable or disable card authentication and payload encryption on the trunk ports of the WSE card.
Step 5 In the Encryption tab, click Refresh. The encryption supported trunk ports details are displayed. See
Table 7-18
for more information.
Table 7-18 Encryption Tab
|
|
Trunk Port
|
All the provisioned trunk ports that support encryption are listed in this column. From the list, choose the provisioned trunk port on which you want to configure authentication and encryption.
|
Payload Encryption
|
Check the corresponding check box in the Payload Encryption column to enable encryption of the payload on a port listed in the Port column.
|
Card Authentication
|
Check the Card Authentication check box to have the source WSE card port authenticate any remote card that it detects. This check box must be checked before you enable payload encryption and authentication.
|
Note For optimal network performance, the encryption details are not automatically updated when you open the Circuit Trace window. The encryption panel is refreshed when the user opens the encryption tab for the first time or when the user switches from the encryption tab to other tabs available in the Circuit Trace.
If the user does not have the security profile to modify the encryption information, the following message is displayed at the top of the panel:
The Prime Optical user is not authorized to modify the encryption data shown below.
For more information on the security profiles, see User Profiles and Roles.
Step 6 Click the Apply button to apply the modified encryption data to the corresponding trunk port. The Apply button is enabled automatically when the user modifies the encryption data.
Note When a value is modified, the trunk port name column in the panel is shown in bold.
Step 7 Click the Reset to reset all the restoration values to the defaults. The Reset button is enabled only when the user has read/write permission.
Step 8 Click the Refresh button to load the current encryption data configuration from the remote trunk ports. If the remote trunk ports do not support the encryption functionality, the refresh operation will not load any encryption information.
Note The Refresh button is always enabled.
The encryption panel has the following limitations:
-
The panel is displayed only for the circuit trace reports information related to OCHCC or OCH trail circuits.
-
The panel is view only if the user does not have read/write access. Read/write access refers to owning a security profile.
-
The panel is displayed (depending to the circuit type constraint) even if the trunk ports involved in the circuit do not support encryption functionality.
-
Auto refresh functionality, or refresh (loading), or modifying (apply) are synchronous.
Viewing a Port or Node from the Circuit Trace Window
To view a port or node from the Circuit Trace Window, complete the following steps:
Step 1 Launch the Circuit Trace window. See Tracing Circuits.
Step 2 To view a port, right-click it and choose Open Port from the shortcut menu (or double-click the port). The
NE Explorer
opens and displays the port.
Step 3 To view a node, double-click it. The
NE Explorer
opens and displays the shelf view of the node.
Step 4 For OCHCC circuits, you can view the complete circuit span between the source and destination NE by choosing
View > WDM Topology
in the Circuit Trace window. This feature shows the complete circuit span between two endpoints.
Editing the Trail Trace Identifier from the Circuit Trace Window
You can edit the trail trace identifier (TTI) from the Circuit Trace window. The Edit TTI option is available on all trunk ports that support OTN. The Edit TTI option does not appear if:
-
You disable OTN on the trunk port.
-
The trunk port is the protected actor of the protection group.
To edit TTI from the Circuit Trace window, complete the following steps:
Step 1 Launch the Circuit Trace window. See Tracing Circuits.
Step 2 Right-click the port and choose
Edit TTI
from the shortcut menu. The
Edit TTI
dialog box opens.
Table 7-19
provides field descriptions. Specify the following information:
-
Level—Select the trail trace identifier level. You can select either Section or Path.
-
Received Trace Mode—Enable the expected string for the path trace. Choose one of these options:
– Off/None—Disables received trace mode.
– Manual—Uses the value of the Current Expected String field as the baseline. An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the Current Expected String is received.
-
Disable FDI on TTIM—Check this check box to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch (TTIM) alarms.
Note The received trace mode must be set to Manual before you can disable FDI on TTIM.
-
In the Transmit area, do the following:
– In the New Transmit String text box, enter the new string to be transmitted.
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode. The string is displayed in the Current Transmit String area.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format. The string is displayed in the Current Transmit String area.
-
In the Expected area, do the following:
– Select the Expected String Type. You can select either ASCII or Hex (1 byte).
– If you set the Received Trace Mode to Manual, enter the string that the target card should receive in the New Expected String text box.
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode. The string is displayed in the Current Expected String area.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format. The string is displayed in the Current Expected String area.
-
In the Received area, the current received string is displayed in the Current Received String area. Do one of the following:
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format.
Step 3 Complete one of the following options:
-
Click
Reset
to reset the values.
-
Click
Default
to restore the default values.
-
Click
Apply
to apply the information you specified.
-
Click
Close
to close the
Edit TTI
dialog box.
Table 7-19 Field Descriptions for the Edit Trail Trace Identifier Dialog Box
|
|
Port
|
Displays the port number.
|
Level
|
Allows you to set the trail trace identifier level; Section or Path.
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Allows you to modify the received trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
Allows you to disable FDI for TTIM alarms.
Note The received trace mode must be set to Manual before you can disable FDI on TTIM.
|
Current Transmit String
|
Displays the current transmit string.
|
New Transmit String
|
Allows you to set a new transmit string.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
Current Expected String
|
Displays the current expected string.
|
Expected String Type
|
Allows you to select the expected string type. You can choose one of the following:
-
ASCII—Displays the string in ASCII format.
-
Hex (1 byte)—Displays the string in hexadecimal mode.
If you choose Hex (1 byte), only one character (1 byte) is allowed.
|
New Expected String
|
Allows you to set a new expected string.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
Current Received String
|
Display only.
Displays the current received string.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
Refresh
|
Allows you to refresh the data shown in the
Edit TTI
dialog box.
|
Auto-Refresh
|
Allows you to set the time interval at which the
Edit TTI
dialog box refreshes automatically. The following values are allowed:
-
None—Disables auto-refresh, if enabled.
-
Every 5 seconds.
-
Every 30 seconds.
-
Every 1 minute.
-
Every 5 minutes.
-
Every 15 minutes.
-
Every 30 minutes.
Note You cannot enable auto-refresh if the remote entity does not support it.
|
Using the Circuit Trace Window to Apply Protection to the Ports in a Splitter-Protection Group
You can use the Circuit Trace window to apply optical protection to the ports in a splitter-protection group.
Overview of Protected OCHNC
OCHNC identifies a wavelength optical path in an MSTP node. The optical path can be:
-
Pass-through—The wavelength crosses the node in its path from source to destination. Pass-through OCHNC has two side line ports as transmit and receive endpoints.
-
Add—The wavelength path starts from the node. Add OCHNC has an OCH filter port as the receiving endpoint and a side line port as the transmitting endpoint.
-
Drop—The wavelength path ends at the node. Drop OCHNC has an OCH filter port as the transmitting endpoint and a side line port as the receiving endpoint.
PSM extends OCHNC on the source and destination node, adding protected OCHNC for add and drop. Splitter-protection OCHNC is bidirectional only.
According to the protection used, the ports involved in protected OCHNC are different even if each protected OCHNC is always characterized by the parameters shown in
Table 7-18
.
Table 7-20 Endpoints Involved In Protected OCHNC
|
|
|
|
|
TX/RX OCH NC endpoints
|
PSM COM-TX and COM-RX ports
|
Mux/Dmx CHAN-TX and CHAN-RX ports
|
Mux/Dmx CHAN-TX and CHAN-RX ports
|
Working TX/RX OTS ports
|
Unprotected-side line ports
|
Working-side line ports
|
PSM W-TX and W-RX (working-side line ports)
|
Protect TX/RX OTS ports
|
Unprotected-side line ports
|
Protect-side line ports
|
PSM P-TX and P-RX (protect-side line ports)
|
Protected OCHNC is supported on:
-
ROADM (2-4-8 degree) and OADM for OCH protection
-
Terminal site for multiplex section or path protection
Wavelength is determined by Mux/Dmx OCH ports, not by PSM units. Protected OCHNC involves all physical ports and patchcords that connect the OCH/OTS endpoint.
Multiplex section and path protection are supported by terminal sites only. The patchcord manager must consider the following limitations when identifying the line side ports for PSM:
-
One PSM and a ROADM/OADM unit supporting line ports requires OCH protection.
-
One PSM and one additional unit supporting line ports requires path protection.
-
One PSM and two additional units supporting line ports requires multiplex section protection.
Note If the node equips more than one side, PSM can be connected only in an OCH protection configuration. Other patchcord creation requests are denied.
General Rules for Automatic Patchcord Creation
Note the following general rules for automatic patchcord creation:
-
Using the Calculate Connections feature, the patchcord manager always tries to connect optical units that belong to the same side to match one of the known layouts.
-
The Calculate Connections feature does not connect OCH trunk and OCH filter ports because it is difficult to add TxP and MxP to a standard managed layout in a multiside node. Every algorithm involving TxP or MxP requires a user-provisioned TxP wavelength.
-
The patchcord manager connects PSM in a path or multiplex section configuration if there is only one PSM provisioned or equipped on the node, and if there are no incompatible patchcords provisioned on any of the PSM ports.
-
To distinguish between path and section, the patchcord manager considers the number of preamplifiers and booster amplifiers, assuming that in the multiplex section the two fiber stages have the same layout.
-
For protected layouts, if more than two line side ports are identified (for example, a node equips three boosters), only the first two ports are connected to PSM.
-
The patchcord manager creates working and protection sides; that is, A(W) and A(P) for PSM in a path-protection configuration.
Applying Optical Protection
To apply optical protection to the ports in a splitter-protection group:
Step 1 Launch the Circuit Trace window. See Tracing Circuits.
Step 2 Right-click a port in a splitter-protection group and choose Protection Group from the shortcut menu. This feature applies to OCHCC, OCHTRAIL, and OCHNC circuits that use optical protection.
Step 3 Choose from among the following options. Unavailable functions are dimmed, and the current function is indicated in parentheses. A menu separator divides the switch functions from the locking functions:
-
Clear—Removes a previously set switch command.
-
Manual to Working—Switches traffic to the working circuit path if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade.
-
Manual to Protect—Switches traffic to the protect circuit path if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade.
-
Force to Working—Forces traffic to switch to the working circuit path, even if the path has signal degrade or signal failure conditions. Force switch states have a higher priority than manual switch.
-
Force to Protect—Forces traffic to switch to the protect circuit path, even if the path has signal degrade or signal failure conditions.
-
Unlock—Unlocks the port from its current state.
-
Lockout of Working—Prevents traffic from switching to the working circuit path under any circumstances. Of all switch states, lockout has the highest priority.
-
Lockout of Protect—Prevents traffic from switching to the protect circuit path under any circumstances.
Caution Force and lockout commands override normal protection switching mechanisms. Applying these commands incorrectly can cause traffic outages.
Step 4 At the Confirm Selector Switch prompt, click
OK
.
A message indicates whether the operation succeeded or failed.
Editing a J2 Path Trace
Step 1 Select the CTC-based SDH NE that contains the VC12 circuit to be traced and open the Circuit table. For an explanation of Circuit table, see .
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the VC12 circuit and choose
Configuration > Trace Circuit
.
Step 3 Right-click a port and choose
Edit J2 Path Trace
. The
J2 Path Trace
dialog box opens. Specify the following information:
-
Path Trace Mode—Enable the path trace expected string. Select one of the following options:
– Off/None—Path trace mode is disabled.
– Auto—Uses the first string received from the port at the other end as the baseline string. An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the baseline is received.
– Manual—Uses the Current Expected String field as the baseline string. An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the Current Expected String is received.
-
Alarm Action—Select one of the following options:
– Disable AIS and RDI on J2-TIM—Check this check box to suppress the alarm indication signal and the remote defect indication when the VC12 circuit TIM-P alarm is detected. This is disabled if you select Off/None as path trace mode.
– Disable AIS on LO SLM—Check this check box to suppress the alarm indication signal when the VC12 circuit, low-order signal label mismatch (LO SLM) alarm is detected.
-
Path Trace String Size—Select the path trace string size (16 byte or 64 byte).
-
In the Transmit area, do the following:
– In the New Transmit String text box, enter the new string to be transmitted.
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode. The string is displayed in the Current Transmit String area.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format. The string is displayed in the Current Transmit String area.
-
In the Expected area, do the following:
– If you set the path trace mode to Manual, enter the string that the EC-42 card should receive in the New Expected String field.
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode. The string is displayed in the Current Expected String area.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format. The string is displayed in the Current Expected String area.
-
In the Received area, the current received string is displayed in the Current Received String area. Do one of the following:
– Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
– Click
ASCII Mode
to display the string in ASCII format.
Step 4 Complete one of the following options:
-
Click
Default
to restore the default values for the J2 path trace fields.
-
Click
Refresh
to refresh the J2 path trace information.
-
Click
Apply
to apply the information you specified.
DWDM Trace
In addition to high-level circuit traces, Prime Optical displays DWDM Circuit Trace-Up and Trace-Down traces. Trace-Up allows you to navigate from one circuit to another circuit that uses the trace-up circuit. Trace-down allows you to navigate from one circuit down to the components of the circuit.
Viewing the DWDM Circuit Trace-Up and Trace-Down
The
Trace-Up/Trace-Down
is organized into a multilevel hierarchy that corresponds to the structure of the
Domain Explorer
tree. The Trace-Up hierarchy consists of a circuit a and link or span, which are displayed graphically.
The
Trace-Up/Trace-Down
window has three sections— the topology tree, the graphical representation of the object, and the Properties pane. The topology tree on the left consists of only circuits. The link and span are displayed in a hierarchical format and shows the feature for the circuit. The circuit has end points and the link has the two ports connecting the circuit. The graphical representation at the center displays the feature for the link. The properties pane on the right is dockable (except for the network map) and provides detailed information about the object that is selected in the topology tree and the network map. When you select an object in the graphical representation, an additional tab appears in the Properties tab, providing detailed information about the selected object. The circuit has end points, whereas the link has only the two ports connected to the link. The alarm status of the links in the trace and the administration status of the circuit are represented by tooltips.
When you launch Trace-Up/Trace-Down from the Prime Optical domain, it displays the individual groups, NEs, and link icons in the network map. Tooltips are displayed for the NEs, links and ports. All groups are shown on a single map, and the zoom level and pan position determine which groups are visible at any time. You can open multiple trace windows and a single map window for comparing different views. All groups, NEs, links, and labels can be zoomed in or out. Prime Optical allows you to save the zoom level and framing of the map.
Use one of the following methods to open the DWDM Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down:
-
From the Circuit Report, right-click the circuit and choose Open Circuit Trace > DWDM Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down.
-
From the Circuit Report, choose Circuit > DWDM Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down.
-
Click the Open Circuit Trace tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
-
From the Network map, right-click a circuit from Circuit Search window.
-
From the Network map, right-click a link to see which circuit uses the link.
-
From the Link table, right-click to open the DWDM Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down or you can trace the link directly.
-
From Link Report > Link > DWDM Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down.
-
From the Alarm Browser, if there is a link, right-click to open the Circuit Trace-Up/Trace-Down.
Table 7-21
shows the color scheme used to represent the administration state and alarm status in the Trace-Up and Trace-Down window. The color of the NEs and ports represents the highest alarm severity on that entity.
Table 7-21 Colors of Administration Status and Alarm Status
|
|
|
|
1
|
Green
|
Active
|
Clear
|
2
|
Magenta
|
Standby
|
—
|
3
|
Cyan
|
Restoration
|
—
|
From the Toggle Frames Visibility drop-down list, choose Properties window. The following details are displayed:
-
Circuit Name
-
Alias Name
-
Description
-
Note
-
Circuit Type
-
Circuit Size
-
Source NE ID
-
Source CTP
-
Destination NE ID
-
Destination CTP
-
Customer ID
-
Service ID
-
Discovery State
-
Service State
-
Direction
-
Protection
-
Wavelength
-
Is WSON
-
Is Monitor
-
Is VCAT Member
The following options are available from the Properties window:
-
Edit Circuit
-
Edit DWDM Circuit
-
Encryption
The units are determined as follows:
-
wavelength (nm)
-
frequency (GHz)
Note Trace-Up and Trace-Down supports only Manual refresh.
The graphical representation at the center has a Layout icon.
The following Layout options are available:
-
Linear Layout—Nodes positioned in a linear position.
-
Saved Position Layout—Restores to the previous saved position.
-
Absolute Position Layout—Nodes positioned from NEs that were saved in the network partition map.
You can export the Trace-Up/Trace-Down details individually by clicking the Export to CSV tool in the respective windows. Check the View Restoration Path check box to display the restoration path.
Note You cannot create OMS Links from the Link wizard. OMS is not supported when FLD-OSC passive card is present.
Modifying Traces
Trace information can be used to find faults. The
Modify Trace
dialog box allows you to change the section trace information for applicable cards. Select a port and click
Modify
to open the
Modify Trace
dialog box. Fields shown depend on the type of card selected.
Table 7-22
provides descriptions.
Table 7-22 Field Descriptions for the Modify Trace Dialog Box
|
|
Port Number
|
Displays the port number.
|
Level
|
Allows you to set the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Note The TTI Level is read-only for the 100G-LC-C card.
|
Trace Mode
|
Allows you to set the trace mode (Auto, Manual, or Off).
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch (TTIM) alarms.
Note The trace mode must be set to Manual before you can disable FDI on TTIM.
|
Note The below fields are applicable to node Version 10.3 or later only.
|
Clear current values
|
Clears all the current values.
Note This procedure has to be performed for section level and Path level separately.
• When the
Clear Current Values
check box is checked.
– Check the
Clear Current Values
Check box to clear all the values.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
– Click
OK
.
All the editable text fields are cleared and grayed out.
Note You cannot enter any values.
– Click
Apply
to clear all the current values.
• When
Clear Current Values
check box is unchecked.
– Uncheck the
Clear Current Values
check box, it modifies some fields and others are blank but new values remain the same.
– Click
Apply. The
current TTI values remain unchanged.
|
Transmit
|
Current Transmit SAPI
|
Displays the current transmit string SAPI.
|
Current Transmit DAPI
|
Displays the current transmit string DAPI.
|
Current Transmit User Operator Data
|
Displays the current transmit string User Operator Data.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
New Transmit SAPI
|
Sets a new transmitted string SAPI Max length 15 bytes.
|
New Transmit DAPI
|
Sets a new transmitted string DAPI Max length 15 bytes.
|
New Transmit User Operator Data
|
Sets a new transmitted string User Operator Data Max length 32 bytes.
|
Expected
|
Current Expected SAPI
|
Displays the current expected string SAPI.
|
Current Expected DAPI
|
Displays the current expected string DAPI
|
Current Expected User Operator Data
|
Displays the current expected string User Operator Data.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
New Expected SAPI
|
Sets the new expected string SAPI Max length 15 bytes.
|
New Expected DAPI
|
Sets the new expected string DAPI Max length 15 bytes.
|
New Expected User Operator Data
|
Sets the new expected string User Operator Data. Max length 32 bytes.
|
Received
|
Current Received SAPI
|
Displays the current received string SAPI.
|
Current Received DAPI
|
Displays the current received string DAPI.
|
Current Received User Operator Data
|
Displays the current received string User Operator Data.
|
Hex Mode
|
Click
Hex Mode
to display the string in hexadecimal mode.
|
Managing Circuit Notes
The
Circuit Note
dialog box allows you to view and add notes to circuits displayed in the Circuit table. If a circuit has a note, the Circuit Note tool appears under the Note column. Comments are visible to all users.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
, choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the
Circuit table
, choose
Configuration > Show Circuit Note
(or click the
Show Circuit Note
tool). The
Circuit Note
dialog box opens.
Table 7-23
provides descriptions.
Step 3 After reading, adding, or deleting notes, click
OK
.
Table 7-23 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Note Dialog Box
|
|
Note
|
Provides space to type comments about the selected circuit. To add your comments to the previous comments, click the
Append
radio button. To overwrite the previous comments, click
Replace
. To delete the comments, click
Delete
.
Note You can enable and disable the Replace and Delete functions in the Control Panel > UI Properties pane > Overwrite Circuit Notes field.
|
History
|
Displays comments that were entered by previous users.
|
Managing Circuit Rolls
Use the following procedures to manage circuit rolls:
Viewing the Rolls Table
The Rolls table displays circuit roll information for the selected NE or NEs. The rolling maintenance function is available in CTC-based NEs to move live traffic from one entity to another. The connections can be single- or dual-ended. Only path-level (not line-level) bridging and rolling is supported.
To view the Rolls table, select a CTC-based NE in the
Domain Explorer
tree and choose
Configuration
>
CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs > Rolls Table
.
Table 7-24
provides descriptions.
Table 7-24 Field Descriptions for the Rolls Table
|
|
Roll from Circuit
|
Displays the name of the circuit where the circuit roll originates.
|
Roll to Circuit
|
Displays the name of the circuit where the circuit roll terminates. This value could be the same as Roll From Circuit when only a single circuit is involved in a roll.
|
Roll State
|
Displays the current state of the circuit roll. Values are:
-
ROLL_PENDING—The roll is awaiting completion or cancellation.
-
ROLL_COMPLETED—The roll has already been completed.
-
ROLL_CANCELLED—The roll has been cancelled.
|
Roll Valid Signal
|
Displays the roll valid signal status (True or False).
|
Roll Mode
|
Displays the roll mode. Values are:
-
Automatic—When a valid signal is received on the new path, Prime Optical completes the roll on the node automatically. You can cancel an automatic roll only when the Roll Valid Signal value is False. One-way source rolls are always automatic.
-
Manual—You must complete a manual roll after a valid signal is received. You can cancel a manual roll at any time. One-way destination rolls are always manual.
|
Roll Path
|
Displays the roll path for the entire circuit roll.
|
Roll from Path
|
Indicates the path that is being rolled away. The original cross-connection goes from Roll Path to Roll from Path.
|
Roll to Path
|
Indicates the new path being rolled to. After a successful completion of a roll, the new cross-connection goes from Roll Path to Roll to Path.
|
Rolling a Circuit
Use the
Roll Circuit
wizard to transfer CTC-based NE traffic from one facility to another without service interruption. The wizard is generally used to move a circuit off a card (for card or facility replacements) or to increase bandwidth utilization (for example, by moving lower-rate circuits across a shared high-rate circuit or rerouting circuits or parts of a circuit). You can roll SONET and SDH circuits only.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
, choose
Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Circuit Table
.
Step 2 In the Circuit table, select the circuit to roll and choose
Configuration > Roll Circuit
(or click the
Roll Circuit
tool). The
Roll Circuit
wizard opens.
Table 7-25
provides descriptions.
Table 7-25 Field Descriptions for the Roll Circuit Wizard
|
|
|
Circuit Roll Mode
|
Select the circuit roll mode (Auto or Manual).
|
Circuit Roll Type
|
Select the circuit roll type (Single or Dual).
|
Roll From Circuit
|
If you selected multiple circuits, select a circuit to roll from in the Roll From Circuit list.
|
Roll Summary
|
Displays the results of your choices on this screen.
|
|
Circuit Trace
|
The Roll From Circuit is traced so that you can select the circuit termination point. Select a circuit termination point from the graphic.
|
Selected CTP
|
Displays the user-selected circuit termination point.
|
Roll Summary
|
Displays the results of your choices on this screen.
|
Pivot/Fixed Point 2 (available when Circuit Roll Type is Dual)
|
Circuit Trace
|
The Roll From Circuit is traced so that you can select the circuit termination point. Select a circuit termination point from the graphic.
|
Selected CTP
|
Displays the user-selected circuit termination point.
|
Roll Summary
|
Displays the results of your choices on this screen.
|
Select New Endpoint (available when Circuit Roll Type is Single; fields depend on the NE selected and the circuit type)
|
NE ID
|
Choose a new NE as the endpoint from the list of available NE IDs.
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork.
|
Slot
|
(For SONET/SDH circuits) Choose the slot from the list.
|
Port
|
(For SONET/SDH circuits) Choose the port from the list.
|
STS
|
(For SONET circuits) Choose an STS from the list.
|
VT
|
(For SONET circuits) Choose the VT for the new endpoint from the list.
|
VC4
|
(For SDH circuits) Choose the VC4 from the list.
|
VC11
|
(For SDH circuits) Choose the VC11 from the list.
|
VC12
|
(For SDH circuits) Choose the VC12 from the list.
|
TUG3
|
(For SDH circuits) Choose the TUG3 from the list.
|
TUG2
|
(For SDH circuits) Choose the TUG2 from the list.
|
Routing Preferences View (available when Circuit Roll Mode is Dual)
|
Route Automatically
|
Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. Alternatively, you can choose manual routing and specify all the intermediate hops on a hop-by-hop basis (up to 64 hops per circuit).
Note If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled.
|
Using Required Nodes/Links
|
(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) If checked, Prime Optical automatically routes the circuit through the required nodes and/or links.
|
Review Route Before Creation
|
(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created.
|
VT-DS3 Mapped Conversion
|
Display only
. If checked, the roll-away path includes the node on which the VT/DS-3 conversion is done. If unchecked, the roll-away path does not include the node on which the VT/DS-3 conversion is done.
|
Time Slot Restriction
|
If checked, you can enter an STS/VC4 value (to be used end-to-end) that Prime Optical uses to automatically determine the route for the circuit. Circuit creation fails if the same STS/VC4 is not available end-to-end. If circuit creation fails, you can try again using different values. The valid range is from 1 to 192 for SONET, or from 1 to 64 for SDH networks.
Note Time Slot Restriction is not available for OCHCC and OCHNC circuit types.
Note For VCAT circuits, you must enter multiple STS/VC4 values in the Time Slot Restriction field, in the Member Preferences table. The STS/VC4 values you enter in the Time Slot Restriction field cannot be identical or circuit creation will fail with an error message.
|
Fully Protected Path
|
If selected, Prime Optical ensures that the circuit is fully protected. You can provision the circuit in a UPSR DRI topology by checking the Dual Ring Interconnect check box. Alternatively, if the circuit must pass across unprotected links, Prime Optical creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the following node diversity specifications:
-
Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths of the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path are node-diverse.
-
Desired—Prime Optical attempts node diversity. If node diversity is impossible, Prime Optical uses primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Prime Optical creates primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path. The paths might be node-diverse, but Prime Optical does not check for node diversity.
|
Protection Channel Access
|
To route the circuit on a BLSR protection channel, if available, uncheck the Fully Protected Path check box, and check the Protection Channel Access check box.
|
Dual Ring Interconnect
|
If you selected Fully Protected Path and the circuit will be routed on a DRI, check the Dual Ring Interconnect check box.
Note For DRI and iDRI manually created circuits, you must double-click the DRI span for it to become DRI. A single-click does not enable the DRI span.
|
Diverse Shared Risk Link Group (SRLG)
|
If checked, fully protected circuits are routed through working and protected links that do not share risk groups.
|
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used to manually route the circuit from the source to the destination specified by the addition of the links selected.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
|
Available Spans
|
Select a link on the map view (related to the selected node) and its corresponding details are displayed in the Available Spans pane. Click
Add
to move the spans to the Selected Spans field. The newly added link appears in blue on the map view.
|
Selected Spans
|
Select one or more spans and click
Remove
to remove them from the Selected Spans field. The removed link appears in green to indicate its unselected state.
Note To specify a DRI link, double-click the link on the map. The map view displays the link as bidirectional.
|
Links/Nodes tab
|
Select the links/nodes in the graphic to populate the selected node field.
|
BLSR DRI Nodes or MS-SPRing DRI Nodes tab
|
(For BLSR DRI or MS-SPRing DRI circuits) Click the
Add
button to open the
BLSR/MS-SPRing DRI
dialog box, which allows you to provide primary and secondary pairs for traditional and nontraditional DRI circuits. Also specify ring and path options for the first and second rings. Click
Remove
to remove a DRI node from the list.
|
Route Constraints (available only if the Using Required Node/Links check box is checked)
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used for the inclusion and exclusion of links or nodes during the specification of route constraints. The included nodes are shown in blue and the excluded links are shown in magenta.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
|
Selected Node/Link
|
Displays the currently selected NE or link.
|
Included Links/Nodes
|
Displays the list of links or nodes that are included in the route.
|
Excluded Links/Nodes
|
Displays the list of links or nodes that are excluded from the route.
|
VT/VC LO Circuit Options (available only for VT and VC LO path circuits)
|
VT/VC LO Tunnel on Transit Nodes
|
This option is available if the VT or VC circuit passes through a node that does not have a low-order tunnel, or if an existing low-order tunnel is full. Low-order tunnels allow VT/VC circuits to pass through NEs without consuming low-order cross-connect card resources. In general, creating tunnels is a good idea if you are creating many low-order circuits from the same source and destination.
|
VT Aggregation Point (VAP)/VC LO Aggregation Point (LAP)
|
(For SONET) This option is available if you are creating a VT1.5 circuit on a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6; or an OC-N port on a BLSR, 1+1, or unprotected node. A VAP allows VT1.5 circuits to be routed through a node using one STS connection on the cross-connect card matrix rather than multiple connections on the VT1.5 matrix.
(For SDH) This option is available if you are creating a VC12 circuit on an STM-N port for handoff to non-SDH networks or equipment, such as an IOF, switch, or DACS. A LAP allows low-order circuits to be routed through a node using one VC4 connection on the cross-connect card high-order matrix rather than multiple connections on the low-order matrix.
|
First fixed point is STS/VC4 Grooming Node
|
Creates the VAP or LAP on the VT or VC circuit source node. This option is available only if the VT circuit originates on a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6, or OC-N card, or if the VC circuit originates on an STM-N card.
|
Second fixed point is STS/VC4 Grooming Node
|
Creates the VAP or LAP on the VT or VC circuit destination node. This option is available only if the VT circuit terminates on a DS-1, EC-1, DS3XM-6, or OC-N card, or if the VC circuit terminates on an STM-N card.
|
None
|
Choose this option if you do not want to create a low-order tunnel or a VAP/LAP. This is the only available option if Prime Optical cannot create a low-order tunnel or VAP/LAP.
|
Conversion Route Constraints (available only if VT-DS3 Mapped Conversion is checked)
|
NE ID
|
Choose from the list of available NE IDs to specify the source NE ID.
|
Subnetwork ID
|
Display only
. Displays the ID of the subnetwork associated with the circuit source.
|
Slot
|
Specify the source slot that contains the DS3XM12 card.
|
DS3 Mapped STS
|
Choose
Circuit Source
or
Circuit Dest
.
|
Review Route (available only if the Review Route Before Creation check box is checked)
|
Map view
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view is used for the inclusion and exclusion of links or nodes during the specification of route constraints. The included nodes are shown in blue and the excluded links are shown in magenta.
Use the right-click menu options to navigate within the map view:
-
Find Node—Opens the
Find Node
dialog box, which lists all of the nodes displayed in the map view. Choose a node from the drop-down list and click
OK
. The selection context in the map view changes to show the selected node highlighted in the visible map area.
-
Zoom In—Allows you to zoom in on an object in the map view.
-
Zoom Out—Allows you to zoom out on the map view.
-
Reset Zoom—Resets the current zoom level to the default.
|
Review Route
|
Displays the NEs that are available in the subnetwork for circuit creation. This pane also indicates the source and destination NEs (and secondary source and destination NEs, if applicable) selected for circuit creation. The map view displays information about the spans selected during autorouting in the subnetwork. The selected spans are shown in blue. When you select a span, its corresponding details are displayed in the Selected Span pane. The circuit summary displays the total hops and the cost for working and protect paths for the routed circuit.
|
Source NE ID
|
Displays the ID of the NE selected as the source node.
|
Destination NE ID
|
Displays the ID of the NE selected as the destination node.
|
Included Spans
|
If you enabled automatic route selection in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
|
Selected Span
|
Displays detailed information about the span selected in the Included Spans list.
|
Step 3 In the Roll section of the Roll Attributes pane, specify the following information:
-
Circuit Roll Mode—Select either:
– Auto—Create an automatic roll (required for a one-way source roll).
– Manual—Create a manual roll (required for a one-way destination roll).
-
Circuit Roll Type—Select either Single or Dual. If you select Dual, click
OK
in the message box.
Step 4 In the Roll From Circuit section of the Roll Attributes pane, select the circuit from which to roll the circuit.
Step 5 Click
Next
.
Step 6 The Pivot/Fixed 1 pane displays the circuit trace. Click the square in the graphic image that represents the facility that you want to keep. This facility is the fixed location in the cross-connection involved in the roll process. The identifier appears in the text box below the graphic image. The facility not selected is the Roll From path, which is deleted after the roll is completed.
Step 7 Depending on which circuit roll type you selected, do one of the following:
a. If you selected Single as the circuit roll type, the Select New Endpoint pane opens. The selections in this pane indicate the Roll To facility. Specify the following (when available) for the new endpoint; then, click
Next
:
b. If you selected Dual as the circuit roll type, specify the roll points and click
Next
.
Step 8 In the
Routing Preferences
pane, do the following; then, click
Next
:
a. Route Automatically—Enable or disable automatic route selection. If enabled, Prime Optical automatically determines the route for the circuit. If the source and destination of the circuit are on the same node, automatic routing is enabled.
b. Using Required Nodes/Links—Check this check box to let Prime Optical automatically route the circuit through the required nodes and/or links.
c. Review Route Before Creation—(Available only if
Route Automatically
is checked) Check this check box to review the route before it is created.
d. Fully Protected Path—If not selected, choose
Protection Channel Access
to route the circuit on a BLSR protection channel.
e. Fully Protected Path—If selected, Prime Optical ensures that the circuit is fully protected. You can provision the circuit in a UPSR DRI topology by checking
Dual Ring Interconnect
. Alternatively, if the circuit must pass across unprotected links, Prime Optical creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the following node diversity specifications:
-
Required—Prime Optical ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path are node-diverse.
-
Desired—Prime Optical attempts node diversity. If node diversity is impossible, Prime Optical uses primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path.
-
Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only—Prime Optical creates primary and alternate paths that are link-diverse for the UPSR portions of the complete circuit path. The paths might be node-diverse, but Prime Optical does not check for node diversity.
-
Dual Ring Interconnect—If selected, the other node specifications (Required, Desired, and Don’t Care: Link Diverse Only) are disabled.
Step 9 In the
Manual Provisioning
pane (available when
Route Automatically
is unchecked), a graphical representation of the circuit is displayed, including source and destination nodes. Select the member from the Member list box at the top of the pane. You must select each member and route the member from source to destination manually, by selecting spans and adding them to the route until the destination is reached. When the member selection is changed, the display is refreshed for the new member. Complete the following substeps; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, select the span to use for the next hop.
b. In the Available Spans area, complete the following information:
-
From—Displays the source of the span
-
To—Displays the destination of the span
c. Click
Add
. The span is added to the Selected Spans list.
d. Repeat substeps a to c for each intermediate NE until the destination NE is reached.
e. Repeat substeps a to d for each member until all members are routed.
f. To delete a span from the Selected Spans area, select a span from the Selected Spans list and click
Remove
.
Step 10 In the
Route Constraints
pane (available only if
Route Automatically
and
Using Required Nodes/Links
are checked), do the following; then, click
Next
to view the
Review Route
pane:
a. Selected Nodes/Links area:
-
Nodes—Select whether to use nodes in the circuit route
-
Links—Select whether to specify the links in the circuit route
b. Click
Include
to include the selected node or link in the route. The node or link appears in the
Included Links/Nodes
list.
c. Click
Exclude
to exclude the selected node or link from the route. The node or link appears in the
Excluded Links/Nodes
list.
d. Click
Remove
to remove the selected node or link from the
Included Links/Nodes
or
Excluded Links/Nodes
lists.
e. Click
Up
or
Down
to set the sequence of the nodes and spans included in the circuit.
f. If the Review Route Before Creation check box is checked, click
Next
to review the route summary.
Step 11 If you did not select
Using Required Nodes/Links
, specify VC-LO circuit options. In the VC LO Options pane, choose one of the following radio buttons; then, click
Finish
(if you did not check
Review Route Before Creation
) or
Next
(to view the spans included in the route in the
Review Route
pane):
a. VC LO Tunnel on transit nodes
b. VC LAP
-
First fixed point is VC4 grooming node
-
Second fixed point is VC4 grooming node
c. None
Step 12 In the
Review Route
pane (available only if
Review Route Before Creation
is checked), review the following information; then, click
Finish
:
a. In the circuit display, review the ID of the source and destination NEs.
b. Included Spans—Because automatic route selection is enabled in the
Routing Preferences
pane, Prime Optical automatically selects spans to route the circuit. This field lists all the spans that the Prime Optical server selected automatically.
c. Selected Span—Displays the following information about the span selected in the Included Spans list:
-
From—Span source
-
To—Span destination
-
Source STS—STS value
-
VT—VT time slot
Step 13 In the message box, click
OK
.
Completing a Roll
Use the Complete Roll button to terminate a manual roll. You can do this when a manual roll is in a ROLL_PENDING state and you have not yet completed the roll or have not canceled its sibling roll.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 In the Rolls table, choose a roll to complete; then, choose
Configuration > Complete Roll
(or click the
Complete Roll
tool). The traffic is routed to the new port.
Forcing a Valid Signal
Use the Force Valid Signal button to force a valid signal on a pending roll so the roll will be completed.
Note You cannot force a valid signal on a one-way cross-connection that is involved in a manual roll.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 In the Rolls table, choose a roll to complete. The Roll Valid Signal field of the roll you selected is set to false.
Step 3 Choose
Configuration > Force Valid Signal
.
Finishing a Roll
Use the Finish Roll tool to complete the circuit processing of both manual and automatic rolls. It changes the circuit state from ROLL_PENDING to ACTIVE.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 In the Rolls table, choose a roll to finish; then, choose
Configuration > Finish Roll
(or click the
Finish Roll
tool). The roll is cleared from the Rolls table and the new rolled circuit on the Circuit table returns to Active state.
Canceling a Roll
Use the
Cancel Roll
tool to cancel the selected roll. You can cancel a manual roll at any time; you can cancel an automatic roll only if the Roll Valid Signal is False.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 In the Rolls table, choose a roll to cancel; then, choose
Configuration > Cancel Roll
(or click the
Cancel Roll
tool).
Note To cancel a dual roll, both rolls must have the same roll state.
Filtering the Rolls Table
Use the Rolls table filter to filter circuit roll data according to criteria that you select and to display the results in the Rolls table.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select a CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 Choose
File
>
Filter
(or click the
Filter Data
tool). The Rolls table filter opens.
Step 3 The Roll Path tab displays the list of available roll paths. Click
Add
and
Remove
to move roll paths to and from the Selected Roll Path list.
Step 4 After making your selections, click
OK
.
Deleting a Roll
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
tree, select the CTC-based NE and choose
Configuration
> CTC-Based SONET NEs
or
CTC-Based SDH NEs >
Rolls Table
.
Step 2 In the Rolls table, choose a roll to delete; then, choose
Configuration > Delete Roll
.
Note To delete a dual roll, both rolls must have the same roll state.
Step 3 In the message box, click
OK
.
Creating Manual OMS Links
Manual OMS links are created using the
Link
Wizard. You can create manual OMS links between ONS15454xx NEs and NCS NEs using
Link
Wizard. Select Optical Multiplex Section layer and choose the endpoints. OMS manual links are unidirectional. To create a pair of links used, you need to run the link wizard twice.
Note The Open OMS Link Table is enabled only if you select OCHTrail or OCHNC circuit from the circuit report.
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
, choose Configuration > CTC-Based SONET NEs or CTC-Based SDH NEs > Link Table.
Step 2 In the Link Table, choose Circuit > OMS Link Table. The OMS Link Table opens. See Table 3-8 for more information.
For more information, see OMS Link Table.
Circuit Promotion of GMPLS Circuits
Circuit promotion upgrades a non-GMPLS circuit to a GMPLS circuit.
Step 1 From the circuit report, select the circuit to be upgraded.
Step 2 Click Circuit > Promote to WSON. The
Update Circuit to WSON
dialog box opens.
Step 3 From the Validation drop-down list, choose the validation mode. For more information about the validation modes, see Validation Modes.
Table 7-26 Validation Modes
|
|
Full
|
The circuit is created when the circuit validation result is greater than or equal to the acceptance threshold value.
|
None
|
The circuit is created without considering the acceptance threshold value. The Opt Valid column in the Circuits tab displays the value “No Valid.”
|
Step 4 From the Required drop-down list, choose the optical validation value. For more information about the validation threshold values, see Validation Thresholds.
Table 7-27 Validation Thresholds
|
|
Green
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is 0%.
|
Yellow
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 0% and 16%.
|
Orange
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 16% and 50%.
|
Red
|
Indicates that the channel failure risk is greater that 50%. The channel failure is at great risk if the risk percentage is between and 70
|
When you position your mouse cursor over the circuit information field, the tooltip gives information about the device name, circuit alias, size, type, and wavelength.
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
The progress bar is displayed. After the operation is successfully completed, the circuit is upgraded.
Validation of GMPLS Circuits
To validate a GMPLS circuit:
Step 1 Select the GMPLS circuit to be validated.
Step 2 Click
WSON Circuit Operations
and choose
Validate
.
The
Validation
dialog box opens.
Step 3 Click
Apply
.
The progress bar is displayed. After the operation is successfully completed, the circuit is validated.
Reroute Wavelength
This task reroutes the
GMPLS
or the
WSON
circuits through an alternate path. This section consists of the following topics:
For GMPLS Circuits Prior R10.0.2
Note This procedure is applicable prior to R10.0.2.
This task reroutes an existing GMPLS circuit through an alternate path based on the specified path constraints.
Note GMPLS OCHCC circuits cannot be rerouted. Only the OCH Trail associated with the OCHCC circuit can be rerouted.
Step 1 From the circuit report, select the circuit to be upgraded.
Step 2 Click W
SON Circuit Operations
and choose
Rerouting
. The
Open WSON Rerouting
dialog box is displayed.
Launch the
Activation
window for a prerouted circuit, using
Circuit Search
>
Open WSON Rerouting
option, and reroute the same preroute circuit from the
Circuit Report
or
Circuit Search
, an error message is displayed.
“At least one circuit involved in Pre-Routing operation was selected. Current Selection will be cleared. Please Activate or Cancel current pre-routing operation.”
You can launch the Activation window in the following ways:
-
When a preroute circuit is created.
-
From a prerouted trail circuit, through Circuit Search > Open WSON Rerouting.
Rerouting a preroute circuit from another CPO server or other CPO client instance, when the
Activation
window is not launched, displays a confirmation message.
“The Selection Contains circuits in Preroute State.”
Step 3 Select the GMPLS circuit to be rerouted.
Step 4 From the
Constraint Config
drop-down list, choose the required constraint type. Values are:
-
exclude Node—The rerouted path does not pass through the selected node.
-
include Node—The rerouted path passes through the selected node.
-
exclude Link—The rerouted path does not use the selected span.
-
include Link—The rerouted path uses the selected span.
Step 5 Right-click the map or click the Add/Remove button to select the node or link to which the constraint is to be applied.
Step 6 Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to apply more constraints, as needed.
Note When you apply a constraint to include a node or link on the alternate path, you must select nodes or links sequentially, from the source to the destination of the circuit.
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
The circuit is rerouted if a feasible path is found that complies with the specified constraints. After a successful reroute, a confirmation message is displayed. Otherwise, a failure notification is displayed.
Step 8 If the reroute failed in Step 7, repeat the reroute process.
Step 9 Do the following in the Re-route Wavelength pane:
-
Click
Clear
to clear the previous selections.
-
Click the
Side
toggle button to view the link side information.
-
Click the
Working
/
Protected
toggle button to select the path.
Step 10 Repeat Step 4 through Step 7 as needed.
Step 11 Click
Apply
to apply your changes, or click
Cancel
to cancel the operation.
For WSON Circuits R10.0.2 or Later
Note This procedure is applicable only from R10.0.2 or later releases.
This task reroutes an existing WSON circuit through an alternate path based on the specified path constraints. Prime Optical uses the circuit wizard for rerouting WSON circuits on node in 10.6.
In WSON rerouting, the circuit wizard enables only the drawers to include or exclude NEs or links. You can select the routing constraints from the network map or by using the options in the circuit wizard and then applying them for rerouting the circuit on a new optical path.
From 10.6 prime optical release, the nodes use the new WSON rerouting frame. For R9.5, R9.6, R9.6.3, R9.8, R10.0, prime optical uses the For GMPLS Circuits Prior R10.0.2 rerouting frame.
The CPO automatically uses the new circuit wizard or the old rerouting frame.
Restoration of GMPLS Circuits
The restoration functionality works on the GMPLS OCHXX circuits.
The Restoration functionality supports the following:
-
You can discover a new optical path when a failure is detected.
-
Works on protected and unprotected OCHXX circuits.
-
Does not exclude or substitute the protections available for the OCHXX services.
-
You can enable or disable the restore feasibility
The Restoration functionality works when the following failures are detected:
-
Link failure—Alarms indicating a Loss Of Signal (LOS) on the span.
-
Node failure—Result of the failure of all the links terminated on the node.
-
Signal failure—Transponders indicating signal problems (for example, OTN signal alarms at RX Transceiver + excessive BER and PreFEC errors).
Note You can automatically or manually revert the service to the original path when the failures are resolved.
Restoration and Revert
The Restoration and Revert operation shows the current restoration values.
Step 1 From the circuit report, select the circuit to be restored.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Circuit Report.
Step 3 Select a node on which you want to perform a restore and revert operation.
Step 4 From the Toggle Frames Visibility drop-down , choose WSON Report.
The WSON Circuit Operation dialog window is displayed.
Step 5 Click the Open WSON Actions dialog box and choose one of the following options to modify the restoration values:
-
Upgrade Restore—Discards the original path and makes the restored path the working path.
-
Manual Revert—Reverts the circuit to the original path from the restored path after the soak time expires. You can manually revert the circuit only when the restoration status of the circuit is Restored and Revertible.
Restoration Configuration Pane
Use the Restoration Configuration pane to define the restoration and revertive parameters required for creating a GMPLS circuit (OCHNC and OCH Trail). You can also modify the restoration values from this pane.
Step 1 From the circuit report, select the circuit to be restored.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Circuit Report.
Select a node on which you want to perform a restore and revert operation.
Step 3 From the Toggle Frames Visibility drop-down list, choose WSON Report.
The WSON Circuit Operation dialog window is displayed.
To access the WSON Attributes panel, choose Configuration > Edit DWDM Circuit.
Step 4 Select the Ignore Path Alarms check box to disable all the other restoration parameters.
Note If you check the Ignore Path Alarms check box, the circuit is created even if an alarm (failure) is active on the optical patch.
Step 5 In the GMPLS/WSON Restoration Configuration pane, do one of the following:
-
Click Restoration to switch the circuit from the original path to an alternate path because of failure in the original path.
-
Click Revert to revert the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed.
Step 6 In the Revertive Parameters section, do one of the following:
-
Click Automatic to automatically revert the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed, WSON alarms are acknowledged, and the soak time expires.
-
Click Manual to revert the circuit from the restored path to the original path after the failure is fixed, the WSON alarms are acknowledged, and the soak time expires.
Step 7 Click Soak Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds), which is the period that the circuit on the restored path waits before switching to the original path after the failure is fixed. The circuit is revertible to the original path after the soak time expires. The minimum value of the soak time must be 00:00:01.
Step 8 Do one of the following:
-
Click Apply to apply the restoration values to the circuit.
-
Click Restore to restore all the restoration values.
-
Click Reset to reset all the restoration values to the defaults.
Step 9 (Optional) To modify the restoration values, do the following in the WSON Circuit Operations pane.
From the WSON Circuit Operations pane, choose Open WSON Actions dialog box. The following are displayed on the menu bar:
– Auto Refresh—Enables or disables the automatic update. If the automatic updated is not enabled and the data displayed in the dialog must be refreshed, an information bar will be automatically displayed,
– A tool tip that reports all GMPLS information related to the circuit is displayed on the menu bar.
Do the following in the Restore/Revert Operation section:
– Manual Revert—Reverts the circuit to the original path from the restored path after the soak time expires. You can manually revert the circuit only when the restoration status of the circuit is Restored & Revertible.
– Upgrade Restored—Discards the original path and makes the restored path the working path.
– Revert Test—Forcefully reverts the circuit from the restored path to the original path. When the circuit is forcefully reverted, the circuit cannot be restored and reverted.
For more information on operations performed in WSON Attributes pane, see Step 13 of Creating, Editing or Prerouting a DWDM Circuit section.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Circuit Reports
The Circuit Report displays circuit information for Layer 1 services of ONS 15305 CTC, ONS 15310 CL, ONS 15310 MA SONET, ONS 15310 MA SDH, ONS 15327, ONS 15454 MSTP, ONS 15454 SONET, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15454-M6, ONS 15454-M2, ONS 15600 SONET, and ONS 15600 SDH. The Circuit Report displays both ANSI and ETSI circuits. Also, both VCAT and member circuits are displayed together.
You can view three types of Circuit Reports within the main circuit report: Spans, CTP, and WSON. These reports are dockable.
Circuit Report Launch Points
You can access the Circuit Report via the following launch points:
-
Domain Explorer > Configuration > Circuit Report
-
Subnetwork Explorer > Configuration > Circuit Report
-
NE Explorer > Configuration > Circuit Report
-
Network Map > Configuration > Circuit Report
-
Link Table > Configuration > Circuit Report
Note You can generate the Circuit Report for a single entity. When you select two different entities to generate the Circuit Report, it will display an alert message.
Note You can select the maximum of 50 devices to generate the Circuit Report. If you select more than the maximum range, an alert message is displayed.
Working with Circuit Reports
To perform actions on Circuit Reports, complete the following steps:
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
,
Subnetwork Explorer
, or
Network Map
window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Circuit Report.
Note For OCHCC Hybrid circuit, the service state of the circuit is reported as TL1_Active when discovered.
The Circuit Report opens, displaying the following information for the selected NE:
-
Circuit Name
-
Note
-
Circuit Type
-
Circuit Size
-
Source NE (not sortable)
-
Source CTP (not sortable)
-
Destination NE (not sortable)
-
Destination CTP (not sortable)
-
Customer ID
-
Service ID
-
Alias Name
-
Description
-
Discovery State
-
Service State
-
Direction
-
Protection
-
Wavelength
Note You can edit the wavelength of the existing circuit from Circuit Report and Circuit Search.
Note • Preferred or Required wavelength selected at the time of circuit provisioning is visible in the properties panel of Circuit Report for the selected circuit.
-
WSON circuits are created with either preferred or required wavelength. Preferred or required wavelength values are updated when the circuit wavelength is edited.
-
For UNI or Hybrid circuits, circuits are created with the preferred wavelength. The preferred wavelength value is updated when a circuit wavelength is edited. Required wavelength is not applicable during circuit create or circuit edit.
-
Last Change Date (PST)
-
Is WSON
-
Is Monitor
-
Is Vcat Member (not sortable)
Note You can also launch the Circuit Report by right-clicking an NE or NE node in the Domain Explorer, Subnetwork Explorer, Network Map, or Link Table. The Circuit Report displays different information based on the launch option.
Step 2 Set filter criteria in the
Circuit Report
. See Filtering the Circuit Report for more information.
Step 3 Configure the custom view settings. See Configuring the Circuit Report Settings for more information.
Step 4 Create a custom view. See Creating a Custom View for more information.
Step 5 Save a custom view. See Saving a Circuit Report Custom View for more information.
Step 6 Copy a public custom view. See Copying a Public Custom View for more information.
Step 7 Perform the toggle custom view visibility.
Step 8 To trace a circuit listed in the
Circuit Report
, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Circuit Trace.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Circuit Trace.
-
Click the Open Circuit Trace tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
The Circuit Trace window is displayed.
Step 9 To view a high-level trace or detailed trace for a circuit listed in the Circuit Report, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose High-Level Circuit Trace.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > High-Level Circuit Trace.
-
Click the Open High-Level Circuit Trace tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
The Circuit High Level Trace window is displayed.
Note High-level circuit trace is available only for circuits that are in the following states: Active, Incomplete, TL1 Active, or Roll Pending.
Step 10 To edit a circuit listed in the
Circuit Report
, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Circuit Edit.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Edit Circuit.
-
Click the Open Circuit Edit tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
The
Edit Circuit
window is displayed. For more information on editing circuits, see Modifying Circuits on CTC-Based NEs.
Step 11 To edit a DWDM circuit listed in the Circuit Report, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Edit DWDM Circuit.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Edit DWDM Circuit.
-
Click the Open Circuit Edit tool in the toolbar of the
Circuit Report
window.
The Edit DWDM Circuit window is displayed.
Note For 10.6, a new Active Preroute state is available for the active circuits that are currently in prerouted state.
Launch the
Activation
window for a prerouted circuit, using
Circuit Search
>
Open WSON Rerouting
option, and edit or reroute the same preroute circuit through
Circuit Report
or
Circuit Search.
An error message is displayed.
“At least one circuit involved in Pre-Routing operation was selected. Current Selection will be cleared. Please Activate or Cancel current Pre-Routing operation.”
You can launch the
Activation
window in the following ways:
-
When a preroute circuit is created.
-
From a prerouted trail circuit, through
Circuit Search
>
Open WSON Rerouting
.
Editing a preroute circuit from another CPO server or other CPO client instance, when the
Activation
window is not launched, displays a confirmation message.
“The Selection Contains circuits in Preroute State.”
Step 12 To create a DWDM circuit listed in the Circuit Report, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Create DWDM Circuit Trace from.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Create DWDM Circuit Trace from.
-
Click the Create Circuit tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
The Create DWDM Circuit Trace window is displayed.
To create a DWDM circuit based on an existing DWDM circuit, right-click the circuit and choose Create DWDM Circuit from.
The Create DWDM Circuit window is displayed.
Step 13 To delete a circuit, select the circuit and do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Delete Circuit.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Delete Circuit.
-
Click the Delete Circuit tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
Launch the
Activation
window for a prerouted circuit, using
Circuit Search
>
Open WSON Rerouting
option, and delete the same preroute circuit through from
Circuit Report
or
Circuit Search
, an error message is displayed.
“At least one circuit involved in Pre-Routing operation was selected. Current Selection will be cleared. Please Activate or Cancel current Pre-Routing operation.”
Note The Activation window can also be launched when a preroute circuit is created.
Deleting a preroute circuit from another CPO server or other CPO client instance, when the
Activation
window is not launched, displays a confirmation message.
“The Selection Contains circuits in Preroute State.”
The
Delete Circuit(s)
dialog box is displayed. For more information, see Deleting Circuits.
Step 14 To open the
PM
wizard for a DWDM circuit listed in the Circuit Report, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Open PM Wizard.
-
Choose Circuit > Open PM Wizard.
-
Click the Open PM Wizard tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
Note Open PM Wizard option is enabled for non-DWDM circuits.
For more information, see Using the PM Table Query.
Step 15 To open the Encryption tab listed in the Circuit Report, right-click the circuit and choose Encryption. For more information on encryption, see Viewing Encryption Details.
Step 16 To Launch CTC listed in the Circuit Report, select the circuit and choose the Circuit Report, and do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Launch CTC.
-
Choose Circuit > Launch CTC.
The Launch CTC window is displayed. Enter the credentials.
Step 17 To open the circuit trace associated with the circuits listed in the Circuit Report, select the circuit and choose Circuit > Open Circuit Trace.
The Open Circuit Trace displays the following options:
-
Circuit Trace
-
DWDM Circuit Trace-Up
-
DWDM Circuit Trace-Down
Step 18 To open the Circuit Trace listed in the Circuit Report, do the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose Open Circuit Trace.
-
Select the circuit and choose Circuit > Open Circuit Trace.
-
Click the Open Circuit Trace tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
Step 19 To open the High Level Circuit Trace, do one of the following:
-
Right-click the circuit and choose High Level Circuit Trace.
-
Choose Circuit > High Level Circuit Trace.
-
Click the Open High Level Circuit Trace tool in the toolbar of the Circuit Report window.
Step 20 To open the WSON related details, select the circuit and choose Circuit > WSON Circuit Operations. The WSON Circuit Operations displays the following options:
-
Validation—Validates a GMPLS circuit.
For more information on WSON validation, see Validation of GMPLS Circuits.
-
Rerouting—Reroutes an existing GMPLS circuit through an alternate path based on the specified path constraints.
For more information on Re-route Wavelength, see Reroute Wavelength.
-
Manual Revert—Reverts the circuit to the original path from the restored path after the soak time expires. You can manually revert the circuit only when the restoration status of the circuit is Restored & Revertible.
-
Upgrade Restore—Discards the original path and makes the restored path the working path.
Step 21 To open the WSON Circuit Diagnostic report, do the following:
-
Right-click the selected WSON circuit and choose Open WSON Circuit Diagnostic.
-
Choose Circuit > Open WSON Circuit Diagnostic.
The Circuit Diagnostic Report window is displayed. For more information, see Viewing the WSON Circuit Diagnostics Report.
Step 22 To open the Circuit table from the Circuit Report, select the circuit and choose Circuit > Circuit Table (or click the Circuit Table tool).
The Circuit table is displayed. For more information, see Viewing the Circuit Table.
Note You can select multiple circuits for which to view the Circuit table, provided they are of the same type: either ANSI or ETSI.
Step 23 To create a new circuit from the NEs associated with the circuits listed in the Circuit Report, select the circuit and choose Circuit > Create (or click the Create Circuit tool).
The
Circuit Wizard
is displayed. For more information on using the Circuit Wizard, see Creating Circuits Using the Circuit Wizard.
Step 24 To add or edit a note for a circuit, choose Circuit > Add/Modify Note (or click the Add/Modify Note tool). For more information, see Adding/Modifying Alarm Notes.
Step 25 To roll a circuit, choose Circuit > Roll Circuit.
The Roll Circuit Wizard is displayed. For more information, see Rolling a Circuit.
Step 26 To view manual OMS (Optical Multiplex Section), choose Circuit > OMS Link Table. For more information on creating manual OMS links, see Creating Manual OMS Links.
Step 27 To promote a circuit to WSON, choose Circuit > Promote To WSON. For more information on promoting a circuit, see Circuit Promotion of GMPLS Circuits.
Once the circuit is promoted, you can view its WSON details in the WSON Report.
Step 28 To merge circuits from the Circuit Report, choose Circuit > Circuit Merge Table. The Circuit Merge table is displayed. For more information on merging circuits, see Merging Circuits.
Filtering the Circuit Report
To filter the records in
Circuit Reports
, do the following:
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
,
Subnetwork Explorer
, or Circuit Report window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Circuit Report.
Step 2 Choose the Show drop-down list in the Circuit Report window. It displays the various filtering options available in the list and you can do one of the following:
Table 7-28 Circuit Report Filters
|
|
All
|
Displays all records.
|
Simple Filter
|
Displays all records that contain the text you entered.
|
Custom View
|
Creates a custom view with selected criterion.
|
Manage Custom Views
|
Edits or deletes a custom view.
Note You can only edit or delete a custom view you created.
|
-
Choose All from the drop-down list. The Circuit Report is displayed regardless of any custom view configuration.
Note The number of records that are displayed on each page can be configured in the Circuit Reports Settings window. For more information on Circuit Report Settings, see Configuring the Circuit Report Settings.
Perform Simple Filter
To perform simple filter, do the following:
-
Choose Simple Filter from the drop-down list.
-
Enter the search text in the Enter Search Text text box to filter the report.
-
Click Apply or press Enter.
The Circuit Report is displayed with the filtered data.
Note Simple Filter looks out for the search text in all the columns and displays all the records in the window. It does not restrict to filter the data in a single column.
Note To only search text within the records of the current page, check the Quick Filter check box from the Circuit Report toolbar and enter the search criteria. Quick Filter filters only the current page records based on the search text.
Configuring the Circuit Report Settings
To configure
Circuit Report
settings, do the following:
Step 1 In the
Domain Explorer
,
Subnetwork Explorer
, or
Circuit Report
window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Circuit Report.
Step 2 Click the Circuit Report Settings icon in the top-right corner of the window. The
Circuit Report
settings is displayed.
Step 3 Make the necessary settings as required. See
Table 7-29
for the field descriptions.
Step 4 Click OK.
Note You must check the Auto-Refresh check box to refresh the window.
Table 7-29 Circuit Report Settings Dialog Box
|
|
Show Text for Notes
|
Displays the message of the Note column instead of the icon.
|
Refresh period in minutes
|
Select the time interval (in minutes) that the data is automatically refreshed. You can select to have the data automatically refreshed every 1, 3, 5, or 10 minutes. The default is 1 minute.
Note You must check the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the window.
The status bar at the bottom of the Circuit Report window displays:
-
Current page number
-
Total number of pages in the report
-
Number of records displayed
-
Number of records selected
If there is any change or edit in the group details of the
Domain Explorer
, it will automatically update the changes in the next refresh.
|
Records per Page
|
Displays the number of records shown in a single page. The default record per page is 100.
You can set the minimum of 100 or the maximum of 500 records per page.
|
Creating a Custom View
To create a custom view, do the following:
Step 1 Choose the Custom View from the drop-down list.
Step 2 Set the match rules as needed for a custom view. See
Table 7-30
for the field descriptions.
-
Click the All link and select Any from the pull-down list to match any one condition in the custom view configuration. Or click the Any link and select All from the pull-down list to match all the conditions in the custom view configuration.
-
Click the no order link and select the column name from the pull-down list to order the custom view. After selecting the column name, you can sort the data in ascending or descending order by clicking on the Ascending and Descending.
-
Click the Showing Columns link. A window is displayed with Available and Visible columns. See
Table 7-30
for the field descriptions.
– Make the necessary changes as required.
– Click Done.
Table 7-30 Match Rules
|
|
All/Any
|
Matches the conditions in the configuration to filter and display the data. Options are:
-
All—Matches all the conditions.
-
Any—Matches any one of the conditions.
|
Order Rule
|
Enables you to order the filtered data. The default value displayed is No Order. Click No Order link to view the order rule values in ascending and descending order.
|
Showing Columns
|
Displays the column names. Options are:
-
Available—Displays all the column names that the Circuit Report contains. You can move the column name from left to right and vice versa using the navigational buttons.
Note Double-click the column name to move the column name from Available text box to Visible text box and vice versa.
-
Visible—Displays the column names that you want to display in the customized configuration view.
|
-
Choose the column name from the drop-down list.
-
Choose the filtering condition from the drop-down list.
-
Enter the search text in the text box to filter the records.
-
Click the Browse button to select the options. The pull-down menu is displayed.
– Check the check boxes of your choices from the list. The selected options are listed under the Selected items text box.
– Click Done.
Note The browse button is displayed only for the Circuit Size, Discovery State, Service State, Direction, Protection, and Wavelength column names.
-
If necessary, add or delete filter criterion by clicking the + or - icon.
Step 3 Click Apply. The next time you open the Circuit Report, the last custom view configuration you applied is displayed. See Action Buttons for more information.
If the report has more than one page, the Previous Page and Next Page arrows at the top-right corner of the Circuit Report window are enabled.
If you want to move to a specific page, you can enter the page number in the Page text box and press Enter.
Saving a Circuit Report Custom View
To save a custom view, do the following:
Step 1 If you need to save the custom view for later use, Click Save. The
Save a Custom View
dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter the custom view name in the Name text box.
Step 3 Choose Visibility from the drop-down list. The custom views are stored in the following two folders:
-
Public—Contains the customized view reports that the SuperUser created. It also has the custom views that the other users created with read/write privileges. You can make a copy of the other users’ custom views using the Save As button.
-
Private—Contains the customized view reports that you created.
Note Custom view name is unique in Public and Private folders. But you can create a custom view name that the SuperUser has created.
Step 4 Click Save.
Editing or Removing a Custom View Configuration
To edit or remove a custom view configuration, do the following:
Step 1 Choose Manage Custom View from the drop-down list. The
Manage Custom Views
dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Select a Custom View from the drop-down list and do one of the following:
-
Click Edit and modify the Name and Visibility as required. Click Save.
-
Click Remove. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the custom view. The selected custom view is deleted from the Manage Custom View list.
Note Users who have read/write privileges for public filter management operations can edit or remove public custom views. However, private custom views can only be managed by the user who created them.
Copying a Public Custom View
To copy a public custom view, do the following:
Step 1 Choose the custom view from the public or private folder.
Step 2 Click Save As. The
Save a Custom View
dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the custom view name in the Name text box.
Step 4 Choose Visibility from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Save. The custom view is saved in a different name.
Note You can make a copy of an existing custom view using the Save As button when you do not have the public privileges.
In the Circuit Report window and the subreports—
Spans Report
,
CTPs Report
, and WSON Report—if the Auto-Refresh check box is checked in the Circuit Report window, the respective rows are automatically highlighted when a circuit undergoes a change. When the Auto-Refresh check box is not checked, a notification bar appears at the top of the
Circuit Report
window stating that the reported data has changed. You can click the Refresh tool to refresh the report.
Searching for Circuits Within a Report
You can search for circuits within the
Circuit Report
using the Enter Search Query text box at the top of the
Circuit Report
window. The Enter Search Query text box allows you to search for circuits by the following attributes:
-
Alias
-
Customer
-
Description
-
Name
-
NE
-
Port
-
Service
-
Slot
-
Type
In the Enter Search Query text box, press Ctrl-Space to display attributes and choose from the list; then type a keyword to search by.
You can use multiple keywords for the same attribute, and you can select more than one attribute. All circuits with one or more of the preceding attributes are displayed in the search results.
You can edit the wavelength of the existing circuit from
Circuit Search
and
Network Map
. However, it is not possible to edit the wavelength value using
Reroute
option from
Circuit Search
.
Tip For hints and examples to help you with your search, click the Help icon within the Enter Search Query field.
Viewing Circuit Properties
To view the properties of a circuit from the
Circuit Report
window, do the following:
From the Toggle Frames Visibility drop-down list, choose Properties. A dockable Properties window displays the following details:
-
Circuit Name
-
Note
-
Circuit Type
-
Circuit Size
-
Customer ID
-
Service ID
-
Alias Name
-
Description
-
Discovery State
-
Service State
-
Direction
-
Protection
-
Wavelength
-
Is WSON
-
Is Monitor
-
Is VCAT Member
Exporting Circuit Reports
To export a
Circuit Report
, complete the following steps:
Step 1 In the
Circuit Report
window, select File > Export to CSV (or click the Export to CSV tool). The
Export to CSV
dialog box appears.
Step 2 Specify the filter parameters in the
Export to CSV
dialog box. See Field Descriptions for the Export to CSV Dialog Box.
Step 3 Click OK to export.
Note You can export the Spans Report, CTPs Report, and WSON Report individually by clicking the Export to CSV tool in the respective windows.
Viewing the Spans Report
The
Spans Report
allows you to view information about all spans associated with the selected circuit.
To view the
Spans Report
, do the following:
From the Toggle frames visibility drop-down list, choose Spans Report. A dockable
Spans Report
window displays the following details:
-
Circuit Name
-
Source NE ID
-
Source Location
-
Source Interface
-
Source State
-
Destination NE ID
-
Destination Location
-
Destination Interface
-
Destination State
-
Is Active
-
UPSR Protection Operation
-
UPSR Protection
Note If the Spans Report is already open, click the Refresh tool within the Spans Report after selecting the circuit in the main Circuit Report. The Spans Report will then display information for the selected circuit. If you select the Auto-Refresh check box within the Spans Report window, the Spans Report is automatically updated each time a circuit is selected in the main Circuit Report.
Note Cisco Prime Optical allows you to select the data in the primary report, and the selected data automatically appears in the secondary report, (that is from the Spans Report to the CTPs Report and vice versa).
Viewing the CTPs Report
The
CTPs Report
allows you to view the source and destination termination points of circuits.
To view the
CTPs Report
, do the following:
From the Toggle frames visibility drop-down list, choose CTPs Report. A dockable
CTPs Report
window displays the following details:
-
Circuit Name
-
Layer
-
NE ID
-
Location
-
Equipment Type
-
Payload Type
-
Interface
-
Role
Note If the CTPs Report is already open, click the Refresh tool within the CTPs Report after you select the circuit in the main Circuit Report. The CTPs Report displays information for the selected circuit. If you select the Auto-Refresh check box within the CTPs Report window, the CTPs Report is automatically updated every time a circuit is selected in the main Circuit Report.
Note Cisco Prime Optical allows you to select data in the primary report; the selected data automatically appears in the secondary report, (That is, from the CTPs Report to the WSON Report, and vice versa).
To launch the Alarm Browser for a circuit from the
CTPs Report
, click the Alarm Browser tool. To locate an NE on the
Domain Explorer
, click the Locate on Domain Explorer tool.
Note Prime Optical reports the NE Explorer GIF label on cards faceplates. The equipment inventory table reports the Actual Equipment Type that is not consistent with the faceplate label. The inventory table remains unchanged in both CTC and CPO.
Viewing the WSON Report
The WSON Report allows you to view details of the WSON circuits.
To view the
WSON Report
, from the Toggle frames visibility drop-down list, choose WSON Report.
A dockable
WSON Report
window displays the following details for the selected circuit:
-
Circuit Name—Sets the circuit name. The name is limited to 80 characters, which can be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special characters (+, #,%, and so on, including spaces).
-
Validation Mode —Displays the WSON validation value used by the circuit. The validation values are:
– None
– Full
-
Expected—Displays the WSON optical threshold defined by the user.
-
Expected Protect—Displays the WSON optical threshold defined by the user on the protected main path. The color status are:
– Red
– Green
– Orange
– Yellow
– N/A
-
Validation Mode (Restoration)—Displays the WSON validation value defined for the restoration path. The validation values are:
– None
– Full
– Inherited
-
Expected (Restoration)—Displays the WSON optical threshold defined by the user.
-
Expected Protect (Restoration)—Displays the WSON optical threshold defined by the user on the protected restoration path.
Note WSON circuit in GREEN status signifies a fiber with low OV performance.
-
Actual Optical Value—Displays the optical value calculated on the optical path currently used by the service.
-
Actual Expected Threshold—Displays the threshold currently used by the service.
-
Restoration Status—Displays the restoration status of the circuit. The restoration status values are:
– None
– Restored and Revertible
– Restored
– Restoring
– Failed
-
Restoration—Displays whether the circuit is restorable and revertible. The restoration values are:
– Revert Auto
– Revert Manual
– Restorable
– Revertive Mode
-
Revertive Mode—
-
Soak Time—Displays the time that the circuit on the restored path waits before moving to the original path after the failure is fixed.
-
Priority—Displays the priority of the circuit. The priority is used in resolving resource allocation when two or more circuits require the same resource during circuit creation or restoration concurrently. The priority levels are 0 (High) to 7 (Low).
-
Label—Displays the circuit label. The label is a unique circuit identifier that is defined during circuit creation. WSON checks the label during circuit creation and restoration at its unique value along the path. Two identical strings can coexist if the referred circuits do not use the same span. The label is also reported as an alphanumeric string in the circuit alarm.
-
Upstream Power Offset—Sets the value of offset in dBm, negative or positive, that the COM_TX of the card uses on its PerChannelPower default value. Downstream applies to the card in the outgoing path of the circuit.
-
Downstream Power Offset—Sets the value of offset in dBm, negative or positive, that the COM_TX of the card uses on its PerChannelPower default value. Downstream applies to the card in the incoming path of the circuit.
-
Diversity—Sets a diversity path for the circuit. An existing circuit that is selected from the circuit pane is used as reference for the circuit diversity. This diverse path that will not be taken by the new circuit is displayed in the circuit pane.
-
Regeneration Allowed—Allows the control plane to find a regenerator deployed in the network. The regenerators are used when an optical LSP between two endpoints is not optical or lambda feasible with a single DWDM channel.
-
UNI—Check the UNI check box to configure the GMPLS UNI on a DWDM node.
Note If the WSON Report is already open, click the Refresh tool within the WSON Report after selecting the circuit in the main Circuit Report. The WSON Report will then display information for the selected circuit. If you select the Auto-Refresh check box within the WSON window, the WSON Report is automatically updated each time a circuit is selected in the main Circuit Report.
Note Cisco Prime Optical allows you to select the data in the primary report; the selected data automatically appears in the secondary report, (That is, from WSON Report to the Spans Report, and vice versa).
The
Open WSON Actions
tool allows you to perform the following actions for a selected circuit:
-
Validation
-
Rerouting
-
Restore and Revert
-
Edit
-
Manual Revert
-
Upgrade and Restore
For more information on each of the above actions, see Validation of GMPLS Circuits, Reroute Wavelength, and Circuit Reports.
Editing WSON Reports
To edit a
WSON Report
:
Step 1 Select the WSON circuit to be edited.
Step 2 Click
WSON
and choose
Edit
.
The
Edit
dialog box opens.
Step 3 Enter the following in the
Edit
dialog box:
-
Label—Displays the unique alphanumeric string that is assigned by the user to the circuit.
-
Priority—Selects the priority level for the circuit. The priority is used in resolving resource allocation when two or more circuits require the same resource during circuit creation or restoration concurrently. The priority levels are 0 (High) to 7 (Low).
-
Channel Power Offset—